Table of Contents
- Check out the Help Guide!
- Notes on using your camera
- Preparations for shooting
- Shooting
- Shooting still images
- Focusing
- Auto focus
- Focus Area
- Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical) (Switch V/H AF Area)
- AF/MF control
- AF On
- Face/Eye AF Set.
- Tracking subject (Tracking function)
- Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration)
- Focus Frame Color
- AF Illuminator
- Circ. of Focus Point
- AF Micro Adj.
- Aperture Drive in AF
- Manual Focus
- Shutter setting
- Shooting with drive modes (continuous shooting/self-timer)
- Interval Shooting
- Using touch function
- Selecting a still image size/image quality
- Selecting a shooting mode
- Controlling the exposure/metering modes
- Correcting brightness and contrast automatically
- Selecting the ISO sensitivity
- Using the zoom
- White Balance
- Setting how to process images
- Reducing blur
- Noise reduction
- Using flash (sold separately)
- Shooting movies
- Viewing
- Viewing images
- Playing back still images
- Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
- Rotating recorded images automatically (Display Rotation)
- Playing back movies
- Photo Capture
- Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)
- Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)
- Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)
- Cont. PB for Interval
- Selecting which memory card to play back (Select Playback Media)
- Copying images from one memory card to another (Copy)
- Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)
- Protecting images (Protect)
- Setting rating function
- Attaching audio files to images (Voice Memo)
- Deleting images
- Viewing images
- Customizing the camera
- Using network functions
- Using a computer
- MENU items/List of icons
- About this product
- Index
Sony 9 II User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for 9 II by Sony which is a product in the Digital Cameras category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
©2019 Sony Corporation Printed in Thailand ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11(1)
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\00COV-ILCE9M2IN5\000COV.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 10:00
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\00COV-ILCE9M2IN5\000COV.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 10:00
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Interchangeable Lens
Digital Camera
https://rd1.sony.net/help/ilc/1960/h_zz/
“Help Guide” (Web manual)
Refer to “Help Guide” for in-depth
instructions on the many functions
of the camera.
Instruction Manual
E-mount
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
2
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\010BEF.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
English
Check out the
Help Guide!
The “Help Guide” is an on-line manual that you can read on your
computer or smartphone. Refer to it for details on menu items,
advanced usage, and the latest information on the camera.
Scan
here
https://rd1.sony.net/help/ilc/1960/h_zz/
Instruction Manual
(this book) In-Camera Guide
This manual introduces some
basic functions.
For the quick start guide, see
“Startup guide” (page35). The
“Startup guide” introduces the
initial procedures from when you
open the package until you release
the shutter for the first shot.
The [In-Camera Guide] shows
explanations of the menu
items on the monitor of the
camera.
You can quickly pull up information
during shooting.
Select an item for which you want
to view a description, and then
press the (Delete) button.
ILCE-9M2 Help Guide
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
3
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\010BEF.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Table of contents
Check out the Help Guide! ....................................................... 2
Notes on using your camera................................................... 11
Preparations for shooting
Checking the camera and the supplied items .......................15
Identifying parts ...................................................................... 16
Front side .......................................................................16
Rear side ........................................................................ 17
Top side ..........................................................................19
Sides ...............................................................................21
Bottom .......................................................................... 24
Basic operations ..................................................................... 25
Using the control wheel ............................................... 25
Using the multi-selector ............................................... 26
Using the Fn (Function) button (Function menu) ........ 26
How to use the Quick Navi screen ............................... 28
Changing the screen display ..................................................31
Switching the screen display
(while shooting/during playback) ............................31
DISP Button (Monitor/Finder) ...................................... 33
Startup guide ......................................................................... 35
Step 1: Charging the battery pack ................................ 35
Step 2: Inserting the battery pack into the camera ..... 36
Step 3: Inserting a memory card ...................................37
Step 4: Attaching a lens ............................................... 39
Step 5: Setting the language and the clock ................. 42
Step 6: Shooting images in auto mode ....................... 43
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
4
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\010BEF.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Shooting
Shooting still images ............................................................. 45
Focusing ................................................................................. 47
Focus Mode .................................................................. 47
Auto focus .............................................................................. 49
Focus Area .................................................................... 49
Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s
orientation (horizontal/vertical)
(Switch V/H AF Area) .......................................... 54
AF/MF control ............................................................... 55
AF On ............................................................................ 56
Face/Eye AF Set. ........................................................... 56
Tracking subject (Tracking function) ............................60
Registering the current focus area
(AF Area Registration)..........................................61
Focus Frame Color ........................................................ 63
AF Illuminator ......................................................... 63
Circ. of Focus Point .......................................................64
AF Micro Adj. .................................................................64
Aperture Drive in AF ..................................................... 66
Manual Focus ......................................................................... 67
Direct manual focus (DMF) ........................................... 68
Focus Magnifier ............................................................ 69
MF Assist ................................................................. 70
Shutter setting ........................................................................71
Shutter Type ............................................................. 71
Using the electronic shutter ..........................................72
Displaying the release timing (Shoot. Timing Disp.) ... 75
Shoot. Start Disp. .......................................................... 76
Anti-flicker Shoot. ................................................... 76
e-Front Curtain Shutter ................................................. 78
Shooting with drive modes
(continuous shooting/self-timer) ..................................... 79
Continuous shooting ....................................................80
Self-timer ...................................................................... 82
Self-timer (Cont) ........................................................... 83
Cont. Bracket .................................................................84
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
5
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\010BEF.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Single Bracket ............................................................... 85
Indicator during bracket shooting ............................... 86
WB bracket .................................................................... 87
DRO Bracket .................................................................. 88
Interval Shooting ....................................................................90
Using touch function ............................................................. 93
Touch Operation ........................................................... 93
Touch Panel/Pad ........................................................... 93
Touch Focus .................................................................. 94
Touch Tracking .............................................................. 95
Selecting a still image size/image quality ............................ 97
File Format .............................................................. 97
RAW File Type ......................................................... 98
JPEG Quality ............................................................98
JPEG Image Size .....................................................99
Aspect Ratio ......................................................... 100
APS-C/Super 35mm .................................................... 100
Selecting a shooting mode ................................................... 101
List of mode dial function ........................................... 101
( Intelligent Auto)........................................102
Program Auto ...........................................................103
Aperture Priority ..................................................... 104
Shutter Priority .........................................................105
Manual Exposure ................................................... 106
Bulb shooting..........................................................107
/ Recall ..................................................... 108
Movie: Exposure Mode ................................... 109
S&Q Motion: Exposure Mode ......................... 110
Controlling the exposure/metering modes ..........................111
Exposure Comp. ............................................................111
Metering Mode ............................................................ 113
Face Priority in Multi Metering .................................... 114
Spot Metering Point ..................................................... 115
AE lock ......................................................................... 116
Correcting brightness and contrast automatically ................117
D-Range Optimizer (DRO) ............................................117
Auto HDR ..................................................................... 118
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
6
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\010BEF.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Selecting the ISO sensitivity .................................................120
ISO Range Limit ........................................................... 121
ISO AUTO Min. SS ......................................................... 121
Using the zoom ..................................................................... 123
The zoom features available with this product .......... 123
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom (Zoom) ...................124
About zoom scale ........................................................ 125
White Balance .......................................................................126
Capturing a standard white color to set the white
balance (custom white balance) ............................. 127
Shutter AWB Lock .................................................. 128
Setting how to process images ............................................130
Creative Style ...............................................................130
Color Space ............................................................ 133
Reducing blur ........................................................................ 134
SteadyShot Settings ....................................................134
Noise reduction ..................................................................... 136
Long Exposure NR .................................................136
High ISO NR ........................................................... 137
Using flash (sold separately) .................................................138
Flash Mode ..................................................................139
Flash Comp. .................................................................140
FEL lock ........................................................................ 141
Wireless Flash ..............................................................142
Using a flash with a sync terminal cord ......................143
Shooting movies
Shooting movies ...................................................................145
Changing settings for movie recording ................................149
File Format..............................................................149
Record Setting ........................................................150
S&Q Settings .......................................................... 152
Audio Recording ..........................................................154
Audio Rec Level ...........................................................155
Marker Settings ......................................................156
4K Output Select .................................................... 157
Proxy Recording ....................................................158
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
7
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\010BEF.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Viewing
Viewing images ....................................................................159
Playing back still images .............................................159
Enlarging an image being played back
(Enlarge Image) .................................................. 160
Rotating recorded images automatically
(Display Rotation) .................................................... 161
Playing back movies .................................................... 161
Photo Capture ..............................................................162
Playing back images on the image index screen
(Image Index) ..........................................................163
Setting the method for jumping between images
(Image Jump Setting) ..............................................164
Switching between still images and movies
(View Mode) ............................................................165
Cont. PB for Interval ................................................165
Selecting which memory card to play back
(Select Playback Media) ..........................................166
Copying images from one memory card to another
(Copy) ......................................................................166
Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show) ... 167
Protecting images (Protect) ..................................................168
Setting rating function .......................................................... 170
Attaching audio files to images (Voice Memo) .................... 172
Deleting images .................................................................... 174
Deleting a displayed image ........................................ 174
Deleting multiple selected images (Delete) ............... 174
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
8
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\010BEF.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Customizing the camera
Registering frequently used functions ................................. 176
/ Memory .................................................. 176
Registering shooting settings to a custom key
(Reg. Custom Shoot Set) ......................................... 177
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons
(Custom Key) ..................................................................... 179
Customizing the functions of the dial .................................. 181
Changing the function of the dial temporarily
(My Dial Settings) .................................................... 181
Customizing the MENU (My Menu) ......................................183
Add Item ......................................................................183
Sort Item ......................................................................183
Delete Item ..................................................................184
Display From My Menu ................................................184
Checking images before/after recording ............................. 185
Auto Review .................................................................185
Aperture Preview ......................................................... 185
Shot. Result Preview ....................................................186
Monitor/viewfinder settings .................................................187
FINDER/MONITOR ........................................................ 187
Finder Frame Rate ..................................................188
Memory card settings ...........................................................189
Format ..........................................................................189
File/Folder Settings ................................................189
File Settings ............................................................ 191
Rec. Media Settings .....................................................192
Camera settings ....................................................................195
Power Save Start Time.................................................195
IR Remote Ctrl ..............................................................195
HDMI Settings ..............................................................196
USB Power Supply ......................................................200
Save/Load Settings .....................................................201
Initializing the camera ......................................................... 202
Setting Reset .............................................................. 202
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
9
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\010BEF.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Using network functions
Using the Wi-Fi/One-touch (NFC)/Bluetooth/wired LAN
functions .......................................................................... 203
Installing Imaging Edge Mobile ................................. 203
Recording location information
to captured images ................................................ 204
Transferring images to the FTP server ....................... 204
Connecting the camera and a smartphone ........................ 205
Using a smartphone as a remote control
for the camera ........................................................ 205
Transferring images from the camera
to a smartphone ..................................................... 207
Connecting the camera to a wireless access point ............. 208
Using a remote commander
with Bluetooth communication ......................................209
Using a computer
Connecting the camera to a computer ................................ 211
Selecting the appropriate USB connection method ... 211
Operating the camera from a computer
(PC Remote Function) .............................................212
Introduction to computer software ......................................213
Imaging Edge ..............................................................213
PlayMemories Home ...................................................214
Remote Camera Tool ...................................................214
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
10
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\010BEF.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
MENU items/List of icons
Using MENU items ................................................................215
List of MENU items ................................................................216
(Camera Settings 1) ...............................................216
(Camera Settings 2) ............................................. 222
(Network) ............................................................... 226
(Playback) ..............................................................227
(Setup) .................................................................. 229
(My Menu) ............................................................. 232
List of icons on the monitor ................................................. 233
Icons on the shooting screen ..................................... 233
Icons on the playback screen ...................................... 237
About this product
Troubleshooting ................................................................... 239
Cleaning the image sensor .................................................. 240
Attaching accessories .......................................................... 242
Mount Adaptor ........................................................... 242
Vertical grip ................................................................. 246
Specifications ........................................................................247
Battery life and number of recordable images...........247
Memory cards that can be used ................................ 248
Number of recordable images ................................... 249
Recordable movie times............................................. 250
Specifications .............................................................. 253
Index ....................................................................257
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
11
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\010BEF.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Notes on using your camera
Along with this section, also see
“Precautions” in the Help Guide.
Notes on handling the product
• This camera is designed to be dust
resistant and splash resistant, but
it is not guaranteed to completely
prevent the ingress of dust or water
droplets.
• Do not leave the lens or the
viewfinder exposed to a strong light
source such as sunlight. Because
of the lens’s condensing function,
doing so may cause smoke, fire, or
a malfunction inside the camera
body or the lens. If you have to
leave the camera exposed to a light
source such as sunlight, attach the
lens cap to the lens.
• When you shoot with backlighting,
keep the sun sufficiently far away
from the angle of view. Otherwise,
the sunlight may focus inside the
camera and cause smoke or fire.
Even if the sun is slightly away from
the angle of view, it may still cause
smoke or fire.
• Do not directly expose the lens to
beams such as laser beams. That
may damage the image sensor and
cause the camera to malfunction.
• Do not look at sunlight or a strong
light source through the lens when
it is detached. This may result in
unrecoverable damage to the eyes.
• Do not leave the camera, the
supplied accessories, or memory
cards within the reach of infants.
They may be accidentally
swallowed. If this occurs, consult a
doctor immediately.
Notes on the monitor and
electronic viewfinder
• The monitor and electronic
viewfinder are manufactured
using extremely high-precision
technology, and over 99.99% of the
pixels are operational for effective
use. However, there may be some
small black dots and/or bright
dots (white, red, blue or green in
color) that constantly appear on the
monitor and electronic viewfinder.
These dots are normal due to the
manufacturing process and do not
affect the images in any way.
• When shooting with the viewfinder,
you may experience symptoms
such as eyestrain, fatigue,
travel sickness, or nausea. We
recommend that you take a break
at regular intervals when you are
shooting with the viewfinder.
• If the monitor or electronic
viewfinder is damaged, stop using
the camera immediately. The
damaged parts may harm your
hands, face, etc.
Notes on continuous shooting
During continuous shooting, the
monitor or viewfinder may flash
between the shooting screen and a
black screen. If you keep watching
the screen in this situation, you may
experience uncomfortable symptoms
such as feeling of unwellness. If you
experience uncomfortable symptoms,
stop using the camera, and consult
your doctor as necessary.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
12
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\010BEF.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Notes on recording for long
periods of time or recording 4K
movies
• The camera body and battery may
become warm with use – this is
normal.
• If the same part of your skin
touches the camera for a long
period of time while using the
camera, even if the camera does
not feel hot to you, it may cause
symptoms of a low-temperature
burn such as redness or blistering.
Pay special attention in the following
situations and use a tripod, etc.
–When using the camera in a high-
temperature environment
–When someone with poor
circulation or impaired skin
sensation uses the camera
–When using the camera with the
[Auto Power OFF Temp.] set to
[High].
Notes on shooting with an external
flash
When shooting with an external flash,
light and dark stripes may appear on
the image if the shutter speed is set
to faster than 1/4000seconds.
Sony lenses/accessories
Using this unit with products from
other manufacturers may affect its
performance, leading to accidents or
malfunction.
On the data specifications
described in this manual
The data on performance and
specifications are defined under
the following conditions, except
as described in this manual: at an
ordinary ambient temperature of
25ºC (77°F), and using a battery pack
that has been fully charged until the
charge lamp has turned off.
Warning on copyright
Television programs, films,
videotapes, and other materials
may be copyrighted. Unauthorized
recording of such materials may
be contrary to the provisions of the
copyright laws.
Notes on location information
If you upload and share an image
tagged with a location, you may
accidentally reveal the information
to a third party. To prevent third
parties from obtaining your location
information, set
[Location Info. Link Set.] to [Off]
before shooting images.
Notes on discarding or transferring
this product to others
When discarding or transferring
this product to others, make sure to
perform the following operation to
protect private information.
• [Setting Reset] [Initialize]
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
13
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\010BEF.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Notes on discarding or transferring
a memory card to others
Executing [Format] or [Delete] on
the camera or a computer may not
completely delete the data on the
memory card. When transferring
a memory card to others, we
recommend that you delete the
data completely using data deletion
software. When discarding a memory
card, we recommend that you
physically destroy it.
Note on network functions
When you use network functions,
unintended third parties on
the network may access the
camera, depending on the usage
environment.
For example, unauthorized access
to the camera may occur in network
environments to which another
network device is connected or can
connect without permission. Sony
bears no responsibility for any loss
or damage caused by connecting to
such network environments.
Note on the 5 GHz band for
wireless LAN
When using the wireless LAN function
outdoors, set the band to 2.4 GHz
by following the procedure below.
(WW942051 only)
• MENU (Network)
[Wi-Fi Settings]
How to turn off wireless network
functions (Wi-Fi, etc.) temporarily
When you board an airplane,
etc., you can turn off all wireless
network functions temporarily using
[Airplane Mode].
CAUTION
For safety, do not connect the
connector for peripheral device wiring
that might have excessive voltage to
LAN terminal. Follow the instructions
for LAN terminal.
Power Cord
For the customers in the UK, Ireland,
Malta, Cyprus and Saudi Arabia
Use the power cord (A). For safety
reasons, the power cord (B) is not
intended for above countries/regions
and shall therefore not be used there.
For the customers in other EU
countries/regions
Use the power cord (B).
(A) (B)
LAN cable
Use a Category 5e or higher Shielded
Twisted Pair (STP) cable with high
shielding performance.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
14
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\010BEF.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
For Customers in the U.S.A.
For question regarding your product
or for the Sony Service Center nearest
you, call 1-800-222-SONY (7669).
Supplier’s Declaration of Conformity
Trade Name: SONY
Model No.: WW942051
Responsible Party: Sony Electronics
Inc.
Address: 16535 Via Esprillo, San
Diego, CA 92127 U.S.A.
Telephone Number: 858-942-2230
This device complies with part 15 of
the FCC rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(1)This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2)this device must
accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
For customers who purchased
their camera from a store in
Japan that caters to tourists
Note
Some certification marks for
standards supported by the camera
can be confirmed on the screen of
the camera.
Select MENU (Setup)
[Certification Logo].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
Preparations for shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
GB
15
Preparations for shooting
Preparations for shooting
Checking the camera and the supplied
items
The number in parentheses
indicates the number of pieces.
•Camera (1)
•Battery charger (1)
•Power cord (mains lead) (1)*
(supplied in some countries/
regions)
* Multiple power cords may be
supplied with this equipment.
Use the appropriate one that
matches your country/region.
See page 13.
•Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FZ100 (1)
•USB Type-C™ cable (1)
•Shoulder strap (1)
•Body cap (1) (Attached to the
camera)
•Cable protector (1)
•Shoe cap (1) (Attached to the
camera)
•Eyepiece cup (1) (Attached to
the camera)
•Instruction Manual (1) (this
manual)
•Reference Guide (1)
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
16
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Identifying parts
See the pages in parentheses for details.
Front side
ON/OFF (Power) switch
(42)/Shutter button (45)
Front dial
You can quickly adjust the
settings for each shooting
mode.
Infrared remote sensor
Lens release button (41)
Microphone
Do not cover this part during
movie recording. Doing so
may cause noise or lower the
volume.
AF illuminator (63)/Self-
timer lamp (82)
When the lens is removed
Mounting index (40)
Image sensor*
Mount
Lens contacts*
* Do not directly touch these parts.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
17
Preparations for shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Rear side
Eyepiece cup
To remove the eyepiece cup
Push the grips at the bottom
of the eyepiece cup to the left
and right and lift up the cup.
Remove the eyepiece cup
when attaching an angle
finder (sold separately).
Also, select MENU
(Camera Settings 2)
[FINDER/MONITOR], and then
switch to [Viewfinder (Manual)]
or [Monitor (Manual)].
Viewfinder
C3 button (Custom button 3)
(179)/ (Protect) button
(168)
MENU button (215)
Monitor
(For touch operation: Touch
panel/Touch pad) (31, 93)
You can adjust the monitor to
an easily viewable angle and
shoot from any position.
Eye sensor (187)
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
18
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Diopter-adjustment dial
Adjust the diopter-adjustment
dial according to your eyesight
until the display appears clearly
in the viewfinder. If it is hard to
operate the diopter-adjustment
dial, remove the eyepiece cup
before operating the dial.
MOVIE (Movie) button (145)
For shooting: AF-ON (AF On)
button (56)
For viewing: (Enlarge Image)
button (160)
For shooting: AEL button
(116)
For viewing: (Image Index)
button (163)
Multi-selector (26)
For shooting: Fn (Function)
button (26, 225)
For viewing:
(Send to Smartphone)
button
You can display the screen
for [Send to Smartphone] by
pressing this button.
Control wheel (25)
Access lamp
For shooting: C4 button
(Custom button 4) (179)
For viewing: (Delete) button
(174)
(Playback) button (159)
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
19
Preparations for shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Top side
Mode dial (101)
The mode dial is unlocked
while you hold down the
unlock button at the center.
Rear dial
You can quickly adjust the
settings for each shooting
mode.
Exposure compensation dial
(111)
Pressing the lock button at the
center switches the exposure
compensation dial between
the locked and unlocked status.
The dial is unlocked when the
lock button is popped up and
the white line is visible.
Image sensor position
mark
• The image sensor is the
sensor that converts light
into an electric signal. The
mark shows the location
of the image sensor. When
you measure the exact
distance between the camera
and the subject, refer to the
position of the horizontal line.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
20
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
• If the subject is closer than
the minimum shooting
distance of the lens, the focus
cannot be confirmed. Make
sure you put enough distance
between the subject and the
camera.
C1 button (Custom button 1)
(179)
C2 button (Custom button 2)
(179)
Multi Interface Shoe* (138)
Some accessories may not go
in all the way and protrude
backward from the Multi
interface shoe. However,
when the accessory reaches
the front end of the shoe, the
connection is completed.
Upper: Drive mode dial (79)
The drive mode dial is unlocked
while the unlock button at the
center is being pressed.
Lower: Focus mode dial (47)
The focus mode dial is
unlocked while the unlock
button at the front is being
pressed.
* For details on compatible
accessories for the Multi Interface
Shoe, visit the Sony website, or
consult your Sony dealer or local
authorized Sony service facility.
Accessories for the Accessory Shoe
can also be used. Operations with
other manufacturers’ accessories
are not guaranteed.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
21
Preparations for shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Sides
LAN terminal
(Flash sync) terminal (143)
Speaker
(Microphone) jack
When an external microphone
is connected, the built-
in microphone turns off
automatically. When the
external microphone is a
plugin-power type, the power
of the microphone is supplied
by the camera.
(Headphones) jack
HDMI micro jack
USB Type-C terminal (22)
Multi/Micro USB Terminal*
(22)
This terminal supports Micro
USB-compatible devices.
Charge lamp
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
22
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Hooks for shoulder strap
Attach both ends of the strap
onto the camera.
(N-Mark) (203)
• This mark indicates the touch
point for connecting the
camera and an NFC-enabled
Smartphone.
• NFC (Near Field
Communication) is an
international standard
of short-range wireless
communication technology.
SLOT 1 (Memory card slot 1)
(37)
Supports SD cards only
(compatible with UHS-I and
UHS-II)
SLOT 2 (Memory card slot 2)
(39)
Supports SD cards only
(compatible with UHS-I and
UHS-II)
* For details on compatible
accessories for the Multi/Micro
USB Terminal, visit the Sony
website, or consult your Sony
dealer or local authorized Sony
service facility.
Notes on USB terminals
You can use either the USB
Type-C terminal or the Multi/
Micro USB Terminal for supplying
power, charging the battery, and
USB communications. However,
you cannot conduct these
operations with both terminals
simultaneously.
• The battery charging time does
not change according to the
terminal you use.
• You can use accessories for
the Multi/Micro USB Terminal,
such as a remote commander
(sold separately), while
supplying power or performing
PC Remote shooting using the
USB Type-C terminal.
Notes on the terminal cover
Ensure that the terminal cover is
closed before use.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
23
Preparations for shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Notes on the cable protector
Use the cable protector to prevent a cable from being disconnected when
shooting images with the cable connected.
To attach the cable protector
Open both of the jack covers on the monitor side.
Fit the two hooks on the rear side
of the cable protector into the two
notches to the left of the USB Type-C
terminal and Multi/Micro USB
Terminal, and then align the cable
protector with the terminal part of
the camera.
Push the attachment screw in and
turn it to secure the cable protector.
Hooks
Attachment screw
Notches
Insert the cable into one of the jacks.
Insert the cable into the holding part
and then secure the cable with the
fixing dial.
Fixing dial
To remove the cable protector
Loosen the attachment screw, and then remove the cable protector.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
24
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Bottom
Lock lever (36)
Battery insertion slot (36)
Battery cover (36)
When attaching an accessory
such as a vertical grip
(sold separately), remove the
battery cover.
To remove the battery cover
Pull the battery cover release
lever in the direction of the
arrow, and then remove the
battery cover.
Battery cover release lever
To attach the battery cover
Insert the shaft on one side
of the battery cover into the
attachment site, and then
push in the battery cover by
attaching the shaft on the
opposite side.
Tripod socket hole
Use a tripod with a screw less
than 5.5mm (7/32inches)
long. Otherwise, you cannot
firmly secure the camera, and
damage to the camera may
occur.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
25
Preparations for shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Basic operations
Using the control wheel
• You can select setting items by turning or pressing the top/bottom/left/
right side of the control wheel. Your selection is determined when you
press the center of the control wheel.
• The DISP (Display Setting) and ISO (ISO) functions are assigned to the
top/right side of the control wheel. In addition, you can assign selected
functions to the left/right/bottom side and the center of the control
wheel, and to the rotation of the control wheel.
• During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing
the right/left side of the control wheel or by turning the control wheel.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
26
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Using the multi-selector
• Put your finger right on top of the multi-selector to manipulate it more
precisely.
• When [Focus Area] is set to [Zone], [Flexible Spot],
[Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Zone], [Tracking: Flexible Spot], or
[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot], you can move the focus area by
pressing the multi-selector up/down/left/right.
• The [Focus Standard] function is assigned to the center of the multi-
selector in the default settings.
Using the Fn (Function) button (Function menu)
The Function menu is a menu of 12functions
that is displayed at the bottom of the screen
when you press the Fn (Function) button in
the shooting mode. You can access frequently
used functions more quickly by registering
them to the function menu.
Hint
• You can register twelve functions to the Function menus for still image
shooting and movie shooting, respectively.
• You can recall functions more quickly by using the custom key function
(page179) to assign frequently used functions to desired keys, along with
the function menu.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
27
Preparations for shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
1 Press the DISP on the control
wheel repeatedly to display
a screen mode other than
[For viewfinder], and then
press the Fn (Function) button.
Fn button
2 Select the desired function by
pressing the top/bottom/left/
right side of the control wheel.
3 Select the desired setting by turning the front dial, and press
the center of the control wheel.
• Some functions can be fine-tuned using the rear dial.
To adjust settings from the dedicated setting screens
Select the desired function in step 2, then
press the center of the control wheel. The
dedicated setting screen for the function
will appear. Follow the operating guide
to adjust settings.
Operation guide
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
28
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
To change the functions in the function menu
(Function Menu Set.)
The following is the procedure for changing [Drive Mode] in the function
menu for still images to [Grid Line].
• To change the movie function menu, select a movie function menu item
in Step.
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [Function Menu Set.].
Select (Drive Mode) from among the twelve still
image function menu items using the top/bottom/left/
right side of the control wheel, and then press the center.
Move to the [Display/Auto Review] screen using the left/
right side of the control wheel. Then, select [Grid Line] and
press the center of the control wheel.
• (Grid Line) will be displayed in the former location of
(Drive Mode) in the function menu.
How to use the Quick Navi screen
The Quick Navi screen is a function optimized for shooting with the
viewfinder, that lets you control settings directly.
1 MENU (Camera Settings 2) [DISP Button]
[Monitor].
2 Place a mark on [For viewfinder] and then select [Enter].
3 Press the DISP on the control wheel to set the screen mode to
[For viewfinder] (page 34).
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
29
Preparations for shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
4 Press the Fn button to switch to the Quick Navi screen.
• The displayed contents and their positions in the illustrations are just
guidelines, and may differ from the actual displays.
Auto mode
P/A/S/M mode
5 Select a function to set by pressing the top/bottom/left/right
side of the control wheel.
6 Select the desired setting by turning the front dial.
• Some functions can be fine-tuned using the rear dial.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
30
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
To adjust settings from the dedicated setting screens
Select the desired function in step 5, then
press the center of the control wheel. The
dedicated setting screen for the function
will appear. Follow the operating guide
to adjust settings.
Operation guide
Note
• Items that are gray on the Quick Navi screen are not adjustable.
• When using [Creative Style], etc., some of the setup tasks can only be
accomplished on a dedicated screen.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
31
Preparations for shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Changing the screen display
Switching the screen display (while shooting/during
playback)
You can change the display contents on the screen.
Press the DISP(Display Setting) button.
• To switch the information displayed on the viewfinder, press the DISP
button while looking into the viewfinder.
• Each time you press the DISP button, the screen display changes.
• The displayed contents and their position are just a guideline, and may
differ from the actual display.
During shooting (Monitor)
Display All Info. No Disp. Info. Histogram
For viewfinder Level
During shooting (Viewfinder)
No Disp. Info. HistogramLevel
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
32
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
During playback (Monitor/Viewfinder)
Display Info. No Disp. Info.Histogram
• If the image has an overexposed or underexposed area, the
corresponding section will blink on the histogram display (overexposed/
underexposed warning).
• The settings for playback are also applied in [Auto Review].
Histogram display
A histogram shows the luminance distribution,
displaying how many pixels there are by
luminance. It shows darker toward the left and
brighter toward the right.
The histogram changes depending on the
exposure compensation.
A peak at the right or left end of the histogram
indicates that the image has an overexposed
or underexposed area, respectively. You cannot
correct such defects using a computer after
shooting. Perform exposure compensation
before shooting as necessary.
(B)
(A)
(A): Pixel count
(B): Brightness
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
33
Preparations for shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Note
• The viewfinder display and the monitor display for shooting can be set
separately. Look through the viewfinder to set the display settings for the
viewfinder.
• The information in the histogram display does not indicate the final
photograph. It is information about image displayed on the screen. The final
result depends on the aperture value, etc.
• The histogram display is extremely different between shooting and playback
in the following cases:
– When the flash is used
– When shooting a low luminance subject such as a night scene
• In movie mode, [For viewfinder] cannot be displayed.
Hint
• The following are not displayed in the default settings.
– Graphic Display
– Monitor Off
– Display All Info. (when using the viewfinder)
To change the display modes that are switched when you press the DISP
button, select MENU (Camera Settings 2) [DISP Button] and change
the setting.
DISP Button (Monitor/Finder)
Allows you to set the screen display modes that can be selected using
DISP (Display Setting) in shooting mode.
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [DISP Button] [Monitor]
or [Finder] desired setting [Enter].
The items marked with are available.
Graphic Display: Shows basic shooting information. Graphically shows
the shutter speed and aperture value.
Display All Info.: Shows recording information.
No Disp. Info.: Does not show recording information.
Histogram: Displays the luminance distribution graphically.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
34
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Level: Indicates whether the product is level in both the front-back and
horizontal directions. When the product is level in either direction, the
indicator turns to green.
Horizontal direction
Front-back direction
For viewfinder*: Displays only shooting information on the monitor,
not the subject. This setting is a display setting for shooting with the
viewfinder.
Monitor Off*: Always turns the monitor off when shooting images. You
can use the monitor when playing back images or operating MENU.
This setting is a display setting for shooting with the viewfinder.
* These screen modes are available only in the setting for [Monitor].
Note
• If you tilt the product forward or backward by a large degree, the level error
will be great.
• The product may have a margin of error of almost ±1° even when the
inclination is corrected by the level.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
35
Preparations for shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Startup guide
Step 1: Charging the battery pack
1 Insert the battery pack into
the battery charger.
• Place the battery pack on the
battery charger in the direction
of the .
• Slide the battery pack in the
direction of the arrow as far as it
will go.
2 Connect the power cord
(supplied) to the battery
charger, and connect the
battery charger to the wall
outlet (wall socket).
The CHARGE lamp on the battery
charger will light up in orange and
charging will start.
CHARGE lamp (orange)
Lit: Charging
Flashing: Charging error or
charging paused temporarily
because the camera is not within
the proper temperature range
CHARGE lamp
To a wall outlet
(wall socket)
• When charging is finished, the CHARGE lamp and all indicators turn off.
• Charging time (full charge): approximately 150min. (when charging a fully
depleted battery pack at a temperature of 25°C (77°F))
• When you use a completely new battery pack or a battery pack that has
not been used for a long time, the CHARGE lamp may flash quickly when
the battery is charged for the first time. If this happens, remove the battery
pack and then re-insert it to recharge.
• Be sure to use only genuine Sony brand battery packs.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
36
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Step 2: Inserting the battery pack into the camera
1 Open the battery cover.
2 Insert the battery pack while
pressing the lock lever with
the tip of the battery until the
battery locks into place.
Lock lever
3 Close the cover.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
37
Preparations for shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
To charge the battery pack while it is inserted in the
camera
Turn the camera off and connect it to a device such as a computer using
the USB cable.
If you turn on the camera, power will be supplied from the computer
or the device that you connected, and you will be able to operate the
camera. However, the battery pack will not charge.
Use the USB Type-C cable (supplied) or a USB-standard cable.
To remove the battery pack
Make sure that the access lamp
(page 18) is not lit, and turn off
the camera. Then, slide the lock lever
and remove the battery pack. Be
careful not to drop the battery pack.
Lock lever
Step 3: Inserting a memory card
For details on memory cards that can be used with this camera, refer to
page 248.
1 Open the memory card cover.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
38
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
2 Insert the SD card into the
slot 1.
• Both the slot 1 (upper) and the
slot2 (lower) only support SD
memory cards (compatible with
UHS-II).
• This camera does not support
Memory Stick media. Slot 1 Slot 2
• Insert the memory card with the terminal side facing toward you, until it
clicks into place.
• You can change which memory card slot to use by selecting MENU
(Setup) [Rec. Media Settings] [Prioritize Rec. Media].
The slot 1 is used in the default settings.
3 Close the cover.
Hint
• When you use a memory card with the camera for the first time, it is
recommended that you format the card on the camera for more stable
performance of the memory card (page 189).
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
39
Preparations for shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
To remove the memory card
Make sure that the access lamp
(page18) is not lit, and then push
in the memory card once to remove
it.
Access lamp
To record to memory cards in two slots
The slot 1 is used in the default settings. If you do not intend to change
the settings and will only use one memory card, use the slot 1.
By inserting another memory card into the slot 2, you can record the same
images to two memory cards simultaneously or record a different type
of image (still images/movies) to each memory card ([Recording Mode]
under [Rec. Media Settings]) (page193).
Step 4: Attaching a lens
1 Remove the body cap from the
camera and the rear lens cap
from the rear of the lens.
• When changing the lens, work
quickly in a dust-free environment
to keep dust or debris from getting
inside the camera.
• It is recommended that you attach
the front lens cap when you have
done shooting.
Rear lens cap
Body cap
Front lens cap
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
40
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
2 Mount the lens by aligning
the two white index marks
(mounting indexes) on the
lens and camera.
• Hold the camera with the lens
facing down to prevent dust or
debris from entering the camera.
3 While pushing the lens lightly
toward the camera, turn the
lens slowly in the direction of
the arrow until it clicks into
the locked position.
Note
• Be sure to hold the lens straight and do not use force when attaching a lens.
• Do not press the lens release button when attaching a lens.
• The Mount Adaptor (sold separately) is required to use an A-mount lens
(sold separately). For details, refer to the operating manual supplied with the
Mount Adaptor.
• If you want to shoot full-frame images, use a full-frame size compatible lens.
• When carrying the camera with a lens attached, hold both the camera and the
lens firmly.
• Do not hold the part of the lens that is extended for zoom or focus
adjustment.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
41
Preparations for shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
To remove the lens
Keep pressing the lens release
button and turn the lens in the
direction of the arrow until it stops.
Lens release button
Compatible lenses
Lenses compatible with this camera are as follows:
Lens Compatibility with the camera
A-mount lens
Lens compatible
with 35mm full-
frame format
(An optional Mount Adaptor
(sold separately) compatible with
full-frame format is required)
APS-C size
dedicated lens
*
(An optional Mount Adaptor
(sold separately) is required)
E-mount lens
Lens compatible
with 35mm full-
frame format
APS-C size
dedicated lens *
* Images will be recorded in APS-C size. The angle of view will correspond to
approximately 1.5 times the focal length indicated on the lens. (For example,
the angle of view will correspond to 75mm when a 50mm-lens is attached.)
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
42
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Step 5: Setting the language and the clock
1 Set the ON/OFF (Power) switch
to “ON” to turn on the camera.
ON/OFF (Power) switch
2 Select the desired language
and then press the center of
the control wheel.
Control wheel
3 Make sure that [Enter] is selected on the screen and then press
the center.
4 Select the desired geographic location and then press the
center.
5 Select [Date/Time] using the top/bottom of the control wheel or
by turning the control wheel, and then press the center.
6 Select the desired item by pressing the top/bottom/left/right
side of the control wheel, and then press the center.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
43
Preparations for shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to set other items, then select [Enter] and
press the center.
Hint
• To reset the date and time setting, use MENU (page 230).
Note
• This camera does not have a function for inserting the date into images.
You can insert the date into images and then save and print them using
PlayMemories Home (for Windows only).
Step 6: Shooting images in auto mode
1 Press and hold the lock release button in the center of the
mode dial, then turn the mode dial to set to .
The shooting mode will be set to (Intelligent Auto).
2 Look into the viewfinder or the monitor and hold the camera.
3 Set the size of the subject by rotating the zoom ring of the lens
when a zoom lens is attached.
4 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
• When the image is in focus, an indicator (such as ) will light up.
5 Press the shutter button all the way down.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
44
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\020PRE.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
To shoot movies
Press the MOVIE button to start/stop recording.
To play back images
Press the (Playback) button to play back images. You can select the
desired image using the control wheel.
To delete displayed image
Press the (Delete) button while an image is displayed to delete it. Select
[Delete] using the control wheel on the confirmation screen, and then
press the center of the control wheel to delete the image.
To shoot images in various shooting modes
Set the mode dial to the desired mode depending on the subject or the
functions you want to use (page 101).
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
GB
45
Shooting
Shooting
Shooting still images
1 Select the desired shooting
mode by turning the mode
dial.
• Turn the mode dial while
pressing the mode dial lock
release button in the center of
the mode dial.
2 Adjust the monitor angle, and hold the camera. Or look through
the viewfinder and hold the camera.
3 When a zoom lens is mounted, enlarge images by rotating the
zoom ring.
4 Press the shutter button
halfway down to focus.
When the image is in focus, a
beep sounds and the indicator
(such as ) lights up.
5 Press the shutter button fully down.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
46
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
To shoot images with the focus locked on the desired
subject (Focus-lock)
Shoots images with the focus locked on the desired subject in auto focus
mode.
Turn the focus mode dial to select AF-S (Single-shot AF).
• Turn the focus mode dial while holding down the focus mode dial
lock release button.
Place the subject within
the AF area and press the
shutter button halfway
down.
The focus is locked.
• If it is difficult to focus on
the desired subject, set
[Focus Area] to [Center] or
[Flexible Spot].
Keep pressing the shutter
button halfway down, and
place the subject back in
the original position to re-
compose the shot.
Press the shutter button down fully to take the picture.
Hint
• When the product cannot focus automatically, the focus indicator flashes and
the beep does not sound. Either recompose the shot or change the focus
setting. In [Continuous AF] mode, lights up and the beep indicating that
the focus has been achieved does not sound.
• An icon indicating that data is being written is displayed after shooting. Do
not remove the memory card while the icon is displayed.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
47
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Focusing
Focus Mode
Selects the focus method to suit the movement of the subject.
Turn the focus mode dial while
pressing the focus mode dial
lock release button and select
the desired mode.
Focus mode dial lock release
button
Focus mode dial
AF-S (Single-shot AF): The product locks the focus once focusing is
complete. Use this when the subject is motionless.
AF-C (Continuous AF): The product continues to focus while the shutter
button is pressed and held halfway down. Use this when the subject is
in motion. In [Continuous AF] mode, there is no beep when the camera
focuses.
DMF (DMF): You can make fine adjustments manually after performing
auto focusing, letting you focus on a subject more quickly than when
using the manual focus from the beginning. This is convenient in
situations such as macro shooting.
MF (Manual Focus): Adjusts the focus manually. If you cannot focus on
the intended subject using auto focus, use manual focus.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
48
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Focus indicator
(lit): The subject is in focus and the focus is locked.
(flashing): The subject is not in focus.
(lit): The subject is in focus. The focus will be adjusted continuously
according to the movements of the subject.
(lit): Focusing is in progress.
Subjects on which it is difficult to focus using auto focus
• Dark and distant subjects
• Subjects with poor contrast
• Subjects seen through glass
• Fast-moving subjects
• Reflective light or shiny surfaces
• Flashing light
• Back-lit subjects
• Continuously repetitive patterns, such as the facades of buildings
• Subjects in the focusing area with different focal distances
Hint
• In [Continuous AF] mode, you can lock the focus by pressing and holding the
button that has been assigned the [Focus Hold] function (page 179).
• When you set the focus to infinity in the manual focus mode or the direct
manual focus mode, make sure that the focus is on a sufficiently distant
subject by checking the monitor or the viewfinder.
Note
• When [Continuous AF] is set, the angle of view may change little by little while
focusing. This does not affect the actual recorded images.
• Even if the focus mode dial is set to AF-S or DMF, the focus mode will switch
to [Continuous AF] when shooting movies or when the mode dial is set to
.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
49
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Auto focus
Focus Area
Selects the focusing area. Use this function when it is difficult to focus
properly in the auto focus mode.
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [Focus Area] desired
setting.
Wide: Focuses on a subject covering the whole range of the screen
automatically. When you press the shutter button halfway down in the
still image shooting mode, a green frame is displayed around the area
that is in focus.
Zone: Select a zone on the monitor on which to focus, and the product
will automatically select a focus area.
Center: Focuses automatically on a subject in the center of the image.
Use together with the focus-lock function to create the composition
you want.
Flexible Spot: Allows you to move the focusing frame to a desired
point on the screen and focus on an extremely small subject in a
narrow area.
Expand Flexible Spot: If the product cannot focus on a single selected
point, it uses focus points around the flexible spot as a secondary
priority area for focusing.
Tracking: When the shutter button is pressed and
held halfway down, the product tracks the subject within the selected
autofocus area. This setting is available only when the [Focus Mode] is
set to [Continuous AF]. Point the cursor at [Tracking] on the [Focus Area]
setting screen, and then adjust the desired area to start tracking using
the left/right sides of the control wheel. You can also move the tracking
start area to the desired point by designating the area as a zone,
flexible spot or expand flexible spot.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
50
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Examples of the focusing frame display
The focusing frame differs as follows.
When focusing on a larger area
When focusing on a smaller area
• When [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone], the focusing frame may
switch between “When focusing on a larger area” and “When focusing
on a smaller area” depending on the subject or situation.
• When you attach an A-mount lens with a Mount Adaptor (LA-EA1 or
LA-EA3) (sold separately), the focusing frame for “When focusing on a
smaller area” may be displayed.
When focus is achieved automatically based on the whole range of the
monitor
• When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, the
[Focus Area] setting is disabled and the focusing frame is shown by the
dotted line. The AF operates with priority on and around the center area.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
51
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
To move the focus area
• You can move the focus area in [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot],
[Zone], [Tracking: Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot],
or [Tracking: Zone] by operating the multi-selector. If you assign
[Focus Standard] to the center of the multi-selector beforehand, you can
move the focusing frame back to the center of the monitor by pressing
the center of the multi-selector.
• You can move the focusing frame quickly by touching and dragging
it on the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] (page93) to [On] and
[Func. of Touch Operation] (page94) to [Touch Focus] beforehand.
To track the subject temporarily (Tracking On)
You can temporarily change the setting for [Focus Area] to [Tracking] while
you press and hold down the custom key to which you have assigned
[Tracking On] in advance. The [Focus Area] setting before you activated
[Tracking On] will switch to the equivalent [Tracking] setting.
For example:
[Focus Area] before you activate
[Tracking On] [Focus Area] while [Tracking On] is active
[Wide] [Tracking: Wide]
[Flexible Spot: S] [Tracking: Flexible Spot S]
[Expand Flexible Spot] [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]
Hint
• In the default settings, [Focus Area] is assigned to the C2 button.
Note
• [Focus Area] is locked to [Wide] in the following situations:
– [Intelligent Auto]
• The focus area may not light up during continuous shooting or when the
shutter button is pressed all the way down at once.
• When the mode dial is set to (Movie) or , or during movie shooting,
[Tracking] cannot be selected as the [Focus Area].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
52
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Focus Area Limit
By limiting the types of available focus area settings in advance, you can
more quickly select settings for [Focus Area].
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [Focus Area Limit] Add
check marks to the focus areas that you want to use, and then
select [OK].
The types of focus areas marked with will be available as settings.
Hint
• When you assign [Switch Focus Area] to a desired key by selecting MENU
(Camera Settings 2) [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key], the focus
area changes every time you press the assigned key. By limiting the types
of selectable focus areas with [Focus Area Limit] in advance, you can more
quickly select the focus area setting you want.
If you assign [Switch Focus Area] to a custom key, it is recommended that you
limit the types of focus areas with [Focus Area Limit].
Note
• Types of focus areas that do not have a check mark cannot be selected using
MENU or the Fn (function) menu. To select one, add a check mark using
[Focus Area Limit].
• If you remove the check mark for a focus area registered with
[Switch V/H AF Area] or [ AF Area Registration], the registered settings
will change.
Phase detection AF
When there are phase detection AF points within the auto focus area,
the product uses the combined autofocus of the phase detection AF and
contrast AF.
Note
• Phase detection AF is available only when an applicable lens is attached. If
you use a lens that does not support phase detection AF, you cannot use
[AF Tracking Sens.], [ AF Tracking Sens.] or [ AF drive speed]. Also,
even if you use a previously purchased applicable lens, the phase detection
AF might not function unless you update the lens.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
53
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Focus Standard
If you assign [Focus Standard] to the desired custom key, you can recall
useful functions such as focusing on a subject in the center of the screen
automatically in accordance with the focus area settings.
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ Custom Key]
desired key, then assign the [Focus Standard] function to
the key.
• To use the [Focus Standard] function while shooting movies, select
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ Custom Key] the
desired button, and then assign [Focus Standard] to the key.
Press the key to which [Focus Standard] is assigned.
• What you can do by pressing the key varies depending on the
setting for [Focus Area].
When [Focus Area] is set to [Zone], [Flexible Spot],
[Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Zone], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or
[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]:
Pressing the key moves the focusing frame back to the center.
When [Focus Area] is set to [Wide], [Center], [Tracking: Wide] or
[Tracking: Center]:
The camera focuses on the center of the screen when you press the key.
Note
• You cannot set the [Focus Standard] function to [Left Button], [Right Button] or
[Down Button].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
54
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s
orientation (horizontal/vertical) ( Switch V/H AF Area)
You can set whether to switch the [Focus Area] and the position of the
focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera (horizontal/
vertical).
This function is useful when shooting scenes for which you have to
change the camera position frequently, such as portraits or sports scenes.
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [ Switch V/H AF Area]
desired setting.
Off: Does not switch the [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing
frame according to the orientation of the camera (horizontal/vertical).
AF Point Only: Switches the position of the focusing frame according to
the orientation of the camera (horizontal/vertical). The [Focus Area] is
fixed.
AF Point + AF Area: Switches both the [Focus Area] and the position
of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera
(horizontal/vertical).
An example when [AF Point + AF Area] is selected
[Flexible Spot]
(Upper left corner)
Vertical Horizontal Vertical
[Zone]
(Lower left corner)
[Flexible Spot]
(Upper right corner)
• Three camera orientations are detected: horizontal, vertical with the
side of the shutter button facing up, and vertical with the side of the
shutter button facing down.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
55
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Note
• If the setting for [ Switch V/H AF Area] is changed, the focus settings for
each camera orientation will not be retained.
• The [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame will not change even
when [ Switch V/H AF Area] is set to [AF Point + AF Area] or [AF Point Only]
in the following situations:
– When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Movie], or
[S&Q Motion]
– While the shutter button is pressed halfway down
– During movie shooting
– While using the digital zoom function
– While the auto-focusing is activated
– When [Focus Settings] are activated
– During continuous shooting
– During the countdown for the self-timer
– When [Focus Magnifier] is activated
• When you shoot images right after the power is turned on and the camera is
vertical, the first shot is taken with the horizontal focus setting or with the last
focus setting.
• The orientation of the camera cannot be detected when the lens is facing up
or down.
AF/MF control
You can easily switch the focusing mode from auto to manual and vice
versa while shooting without changing your holding position.
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ Custom Key] or
[Custom Key] desired button [AF/MF Control Hold] or
[AF/MF Ctrl Toggle].
AF/MF Control Hold: Switches the focusing mode while the button is held
down.
AF/MF Ctrl Toggle: Switches the focusing mode until the button is
pressed again.
Note
• You cannot set the [AF/MF Control Hold] function to [Left Button],
[Right Button] or [Down Button] of the control wheel.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
56
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
AF On
You can focus without pressing the shutter button halfway down. The
settings for the focus mode dial will be applied.
Press the AF-ON(AF On) button while shooting in autofocus
mode.
Hint
• Set [ AF w/ shutter] to [Off] when you do not want to perform auto
focusing using the shutter button.
• Set [ AF w/ shutter], [ Pre-AF], and [ Eye-Start AF] to [Off] to focus at
a specific shooting distance predicting the position of the subject.
Face/Eye AF Set.
This function is used to determine whether or not the camera will focus
with priority on faces or eyes.
There are two ways to perform [Eye AF]. For details, refer to the
“Help Guide.”
• Focusing on the eyes by pressing the shutter button halfway down.
• Focusing on the eyes by pressing the custom key. For details on using
the custom key to perform [Eye AF], refer to page58.
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [Face/Eye AF Set.] desired
setting item.
Face/Eye Priority in AF: Sets whether or not to detect faces or eyes inside
the focusing area and focus on the eyes (Eye AF) when autofocus is
activated. ([On]/[Off])
(Note: The camera operations are different when using the custom key
to execute [Eye AF].)
Subject Detection: Selects the target to be detected.
[Human]: Detects human faces/eyes.
[Animal]: Detects animal eyes. Animal faces are not detected.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
57
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Right/Left Eye Select: Specifies the eye to be detected when
[Subject Detection] is set to [Human]. If [Right Eye] or [Left Eye] is
selected, only the selected eye is detected.
[Auto]: The camera detects eyes automatically.
[Right Eye]: The right eye of the subject (the eye on the left side from
the photographer’s perspective) is detected.
[Left Eye]: The left eye of the subject (the eye on the right side from the
photographer’s perspective) is detected.
Face/Eye Frame Display: Sets whether or not to display the face/eye
detection frame when a human face or eyes are detected. ([On]/[Off])
Animal Eye Display: Sets whether or not to display the eye detection
frame when the eye of an animal is detected. ([On]/[Off])
Face detection frame
When the product detects a face, the gray face
detection frame appears. When the product
determines that autofocus is enabled, the face
detection frame turns white.
In case you have registered the priority order for
each face using [Face Registration], the product
automatically selects the first prioritized face
and the face detection frame over that face
turns white. The face detection frames of other
registered faces turn reddish-purple.
Eye detection frame
A white eye detection frame appears when an
eye is detected and the camera determines
that autofocusing is possible, depending on the
settings.
The eye detection frame is displayed as
illustrated when [Subject Detection] is set to
[Animal].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
58
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
[Eye AF] by custom key
The Eye AF function can also be used by assigning [Eye AF] to a custom
key. The camera can focus on human eyes as long as you are pressing the
key. This is useful when you want to temporarily apply the Eye AF function
to the entire screen regardless of the setting for [Focus Area]. The camera
does not focus automatically if no faces or eyes are detected.
(Note: When you try to focus on eyes by pressing the shutter button
halfway down, the camera only detects faces or eyes inside the focus area
designated with [Focus Area]. If the camera detects no faces or eyes, it
performs normal auto-focusing.)
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ Custom Key] or
[ Custom Key] desired key, then assign the [Eye AF]
function to the key.
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [Face/Eye AF Set.]
[Subject Detection] desired setting.
Point the camera at the face of a human or animal, and
press the key to which you have assigned the [Eye AF]
function.
To shoot a still image, press the shutter button while pressing the key.
[Switch Right/Left Eye] by custom key
When [Subject Detection] is set to [Human] and [Right/Left Eye Select]
is set to [Right Eye] or [Left Eye], you can switch the eye to be
detected by pressing the custom key to which you have assigned the
[Switch Right/Left Eye] function.
When [Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Auto], you can temporarily switch
the eye to be detected by pressing the custom key to which you have
assigned the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function.
The temporary left/right selection is cancelled when you perform the
following operations, etc. The camera returns to automatic eye detection.
• Pressing the center of the control wheel
• Pressing the center of the multi-selector
• Stopping pressing the shutter button halfway down (only during still
image shooting)
• Stopping pressing the custom key to which [AF On] or [Eye AF] is
assigned (only during still image shooting)
• Pressing the MENU button
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
59
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Hint
• When [Right/Left Eye Select] is not set to [Auto], or you execute
[Switch Right/Left Eye] using the custom key, the eye detection
frame appears. Even when [Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Auto], if
[Face/Eye Frame Display] is set to [On], the eye detection frame will appear
over detected eyes during movie shooting.
• If you want the face or eye detection frame to disappear within a certain
period of time after the camera has focused on the face or eye, set
[AF Area Auto Clear] to [On].
Note
• When [Subject Detection] is set to [Human], the eyes of animals are not
detected. When [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], human faces are not
detected.
• When [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], the following functions cannot be
used.
– Right/Left Eye Select
– Face Priority in Multi Metering
– Regist. Faces Priority
• The [Eye AF] function may not function very well in the following situations:
– When the person is wearing sunglasses.
– When the front hair covers the person’s eyes.
– In low-light or back-lit conditions.
– When the eyes are closed.
– When the person is in the shade.
– When the person is out of focus.
– When the person is moving too much.
• If the subject is moving too much, the detection frame may not be displayed
correctly over their eyes.
• Depending on the circumstances, the eyes cannot be focused.
• When the camera cannot focus on human eyes, it will detect and focus on
the face instead. The camera cannot focus on eyes when no human faces are
detected.
• The product may not detect faces at all or may accidentally detect other
objects as faces in some conditions.
• When recording movies with [Subject Detection] set to [Animal], you cannot
use the eye detection function.
• The eye detection frame is not displayed when the Eye AF function is
unavailable.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
60
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
• You cannot use the face/eye detection function with the following functions:
– Zoom functions other than the optical zoom.
– [Posterization] under [Picture Effect]
– Focus Magnifier
– Movie shooting with [ Record Setting] set to [120p]/[100p]
– When [ Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps] during slow-motion/
quick-motion shooting.
– When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], [ Record Setting] is set to
[30p 100M]/[25p 100M] or [30p 60M]/[25p 60M], and
[4K Output Select] is set to [Memory Card+HDMI]
• Up to 8 faces of your subjects can be detected.
• Even if [Face/Eye Frame Display] or [Animal Eye Display] is set to [Off], a green
focusing frame will be displayed over faces or eyes that are in focus.
• When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Face/Eye Priority in AF]
is locked to [On].
• To detect animal eyes, arrange the composition so that both eyes and the
nose of the animal are within the angle of view. Once you focus on the
animal’s face, the animal’s eyes will be detected more easily.
• Even when [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], the eyes of some types of
animals cannot be detected.
Tracking subject (Tracking function)
This camera has the function of tracking which tracks the subject, and
keeps marking it with the focusing frame.
You can set the start position to track by selecting from focusing areas, or
by specifying by touch operation. The required function varies depending
on the setting method.
Setting the start position to track by focusing area
([Tracking] under [Focus Area])
The selected focusing frame is set as the start position to track, and the
tracking starts by pressing the shutter button halfway down (page49).
• This function is available in still image shooting mode.
• This function is available when [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].
• When [Face/Eye Priority in AF] under [Face/Eye AF Set.] is set to [On], if
the camera detects a face/eye, it will track that face or eye.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
61
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Setting the start position to track by touch operation
([Touch Tracking] under [Func. of Touch Operation])
You can set the subject to track by touching it on the monitor (page95).
• This function is available in still image shooting mode and movie
shooting mode.
• This function is available when [Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF],
[Continuous AF], or [DMF].
Changing the setting for [Focus Area] to [Tracking]
temporarily ([Tracking On] under [ Custom Key])
Even [Focus Area] is set to other than [Tracking], you can temporarily
change the setting for [Focus Area] to [Tracking] while pressing and
holding the key to which you have assigned [Tracking On] function.
• Assign the [Tracking On] function to a desired key using
[Custom Key] in advance (page179).
• This function is available in still image shooting mode.
• This function is available when [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].
Registering the current focus area ( AF Area Registration)
You can move the focusing frame to a preassigned position temporarily
using a custom key. This function is useful when shooting scenes in which
the subject’s movements are predictable; for example, sports scenes.
With this function, you can switch the focus area quickly according to the
situation.
How to register a focus area
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [ AF Area Registration]
[On].
Set the focus area to the desired position and then hold
down the Fn(Function) button.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
62
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
How to call up the registered focus area
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ Custom Key]
desired key, then select [Regist. AF Area hold].
Set the camera to the shooting mode, hold down the key
to which [Regist. AF Area hold] has been assigned and
then press the shutter button to shoot images.
Hint
• When a focusing frame is registered using [ AF Area Registration], the
registered focusing frame flashes on the monitor.
• If you assign [Regist AF Area tggle] to a custom key, you can use the
registered focusing frame without holding down the key.
• If [Reg. AF Area + AF On] is assigned to a custom key, auto focusing using the
registered focusing frame is performed when the key is pressed.
Note
• A focus area cannot be registered in the following situations:
– The mode dial is set to either (Movie) or
– While [Touch Focus] is being performed
– While using the digital zoom function
– While [Touch Tracking] is being performed
– While focusing
– While performing focus lock
• You cannot assign [Regist. AF Area hold] to [Left Button], [Right Button], or
[Down Button].
• You cannot call up the registered focus area in the following situations:
– The mode dial is set to either (Auto Mode), (Movie) or
• When [ AF Area Registration] is set to [On], the [Lock Operation Parts]
setting is locked to [Off].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
63
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Focus Frame Color
You can specify the color of the frame indicating the focusing area. If the
frame is difficult to see because of the subject, make it more visible by
changing its color.
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [Focus Frame Color]
desired color.
White: Displays the frame indicating the focusing area in white.
Red: Displays the frame indicating the focusing area in red.
AF Illuminator
The AF illuminator supplies fill light to focus more easily on a subject
in dark surroundings. In the time between pressing the shutter button
halfway down and locking the focus, the AF illuminator lights up to allow
the camera to focus easily.
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [ AF Illuminator]
desired setting.
Auto: The AF illuminator lights up automatically in dark surroundings.
Off: Does not use the AF illuminator.
Note
• You cannot use [ AF Illuminator] in the following situations:
– When the shooting mode is [Movie] or [S&Q Motion].
– When the focus mode is set to [Continuous AF].
– When [Focus Magnifier] is activated (page69).
– When a Mount Adaptor is attached.
• If the Multi Interface Shoe is equipped with a flash with an AF illuminator
function, when the flash is turned on, the AF illuminator will turn on as well.
• The AF illuminator emits a very bright light. Although there is no health
hazard, do not look directly into the AF illuminator at close range.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
64
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Circ. of Focus Point
Sets whether to allow the focusing frame to jump from one end to
the other when you move the focusing frame with [Focus Area] set
to [Zone], [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Zone],
[Tracking: Flexible Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]. This function
is useful when you want to move the focusing frame from one end to the
other quickly.
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [Circ. of Focus Point]
desired setting.
Does Not Circulate: The cursor does not move when you try to move the
focusing frame past the end.
Circulate: The cursor jumps to the opposite end when you try to move
the focusing frame past the end.
When [Circulate] is selected:
Note
• Even if you set [Circ. of Focus Point] to [Circulate], the focusing frame will not
circulate diagonally.
AF Micro Adj.
Allows you to adjust the auto-focusing position and register an adjusted
value for each lens when using A-mount lenses with an LA-EA2 or LA-EA4
Mount Adaptor (sold separately).
Use this function only when adjustments are needed. Note that the auto
focus function may not be performed at a proper position when using this
adjustment.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
65
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
1 MENU (Camera Settings 1) [AF Micro Adj.].
2 Select [AF Adjustment Set.] [On].
3 [amount] desired value.
• The larger the value you select, the farther the autofocused position
will be from the product. The smaller the value you select, the closer
the autofocused position will be to the product.
Hint
• It is recommended that you adjust the position under actual shooting
conditions. Set [Focus Area] to [Flexible Spot] and use a bright subject with
high contrast when you adjust.
Note
• When you attach a lens for which you have already registered a value, the
registered value appears on the screen. [±0] appears for lenses for which a
value has not yet been registered.
• If [–] is displayed as the value, then a total of 30 lenses have been registered
and no new lens can be registered. To register a new lens, attach a lens for
which the registration can be erased, and set its value to [±0], or reset the
values of all the lenses using [Clear].
• The [AF Micro Adj.] supports Sony, Minolta, or Konica-Minolta lenses. If you
perform [AF Micro Adj.] with lenses other than the supported lenses, the
registered settings for the supported lenses may be affected. Do not perform
[AF Micro Adj.] with an unsupported lens.
• You cannot set [AF Micro Adj.] individually for a Sony, Minolta, and
Konica-Minolta lens of the same specification.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
66
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Aperture Drive in AF
Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize the auto-focusing tracking
performance or to prioritize silence.
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [Aperture Drive in AF]
desired setting.
Focus Priority: Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize auto-
focusing performance.
Standard: Uses the standard aperture drive system.
Silent Priority: Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize silence so
that the sound from the aperture drive is quieter than in [Standard].
Note
• When [Focus Priority] is selected, sound from the aperture drive may be
audible, or the aperture effect may not be visible on the monitor. Also, the
continuous shooting speed may become slower or the screen may flicker. To
avoid these phenomena, change the setting to [Standard].
• When [Silent Priority] is selected, the focusing speed may become slower, and
it may be more difficult to focus on a subject.
• Focus during continuous shooting is locked to the setting of the first
shot when the parameter for [Aperture Drive in AF] is set to [Standard] or
[Silent Priority], and the F-value is greater than F16.
• The effect may differ depending on the lens you use and the shooting
conditions.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
67
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Manual Focus
When it is difficult to focus properly in the autofocus mode, you can adjust
the focus manually.
1 Turn the focus mode dial
while pressing the focus mode
dial lock release button and
select MF.
Focus mode dial lock release
button
Focus mode dial
2 Rotate the focusing ring to
achieve sharp focus.
• When you rotate the focusing
ring, the focus distance is
displayed on the screen. The
focus distance is not displayed
when the Mount Adaptor
(sold separately) is attached.
3 Press the shutter button fully down to shoot an image.
Note
• When you use the viewfinder, adjust the diopter level to obtain the correct
focus on the viewfinder (page18).
• The displayed focus distance is just a reference.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
68
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Direct manual focus (DMF)
You can make fine adjustments manually after performing auto focusing,
letting you focus on a subject more quickly than when using the manual
focus from the beginning. This is convenient in situations such as macro
shooting.
1 Turn the focus mode dial
while pressing the focus mode
dial lock release button and
select DMF.
Focus mode dial lock release
button
Focus mode dial
2 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus automatically.
3 Keep the shutter button
pressed halfway down, and
then rotate the focusing ring
to achieve a sharper focus.
• When you rotate the focusing
ring, the focus distance is
displayed on the screen. The
focus distance is not displayed
when the Mount Adaptor
(sold separately) is attached.
4 Press the shutter button fully down to shoot an image.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
69
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Focus Magnifier
You can check the focus by enlarging the image before shooting. Unlike
with [ MF Assist], you can magnify the image without operating the
focus ring.
1 MENU (Camera Settings 1) [Focus Magnifier].
2 Press the center of the multi-selector to enlarge the image and
select the area you want to enlarge by pressing the multi-
selector up/down/left/right.
• Each time you press the center, the magnification scale will change.
• You can set the initial magnification by selecting MENU
(Camera Settings 1) [ Initial Focus Mag.].
3 Confirm the focus.
• Press the (Delete) button to bring the magnified position into the
center of an image.
• When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can adjust the focus
while an image is magnified. If [ AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off],
the [Focus Magnifier] function is canceled when the shutter button is
pressed halfway down.
• When the shutter button is pressed halfway down while an image
is magnified during the auto-focusing, different functions are
performed depending on the [ AF in Focus Mag.] setting.
– When [ AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [On]:
Auto-focusing is performed again.
– When [ AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off]:
The [Focus Magnifier] function is canceled.
• You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by
selecting MENU (Camera Settings 1) [Focus Magnif. Time].
4 Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
70
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
To use the focus magnifier function by touch operation
You can magnify the image and adjust the focus by touching the
monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On] beforehand. Then, select the
appropriate settings under [Touch Panel/Pad]. When the focus mode is
[Manual Focus], you can perform [Focus Magnifier] by double-tapping the
area to focus on while shooting with the monitor.
While shooting with the viewfinder, a frame is displayed in the center of
the monitor by double-tapping and you can move the frame by dragging
it. The image is magnified by pressing the center of the multi-selector.
Hint
• While using the focus magnifier function, you can move the magnified area
by dragging it on the touch panel.
• To exit the focus magnifier function, double-tap the monitor again. When
[AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off], the focus magnifier function is ended by
pressing the shutter button halfway down.
MF Assist
Enlarges the image on the screen automatically to make manual focusing
easier. This works in Manual Focus or Direct Manual Focus shooting.
1 MENU (Camera Settings 1) [ MF Assist] [On].
2 Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.
• The image is enlarged. You can magnify images further by pressing
the center of the control wheel.
Hint
• You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU
(Camera Settings 1) [Focus Magnif. Time].
Note
• You cannot use [ MF Assist] when shooting movies. Use the
[Focus Magnifier] function instead.
• [ MF Assist] is not available when a Mount Adaptor is attached. Use the
[Focus Magnifier] function instead.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
71
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Shutter setting
Shutter Type
You can set whether to shoot with a mechanical shutter or an electronic
shutter.
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ Shutter Type] desired
setting.
Auto: The shutter type is automatically switched based on the shooting
conditions and shutter speed.
Mechanical Shutter: Shoot with the mechanical shutter only.
Electronic Shutter: Shoot with the electronic shutter only.
Hint
• In the following situations, set the [ Shutter Type] to [Auto] or
[Electronic Shutter].
– When shooting with a high-speed shutter in a bright environment such as
outside in bright sunlight, the beach, or snowy mountains.
– When you want to increase the speed of continuous shooting.
Note
• In rare cases, the shutter sound may be produced when the power is turned
off even if the [ Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter]. However, this is
not a malfunction.
• In the following situations, the mechanical shutter will be activated even if the
[Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].
– When capturing a standard white color for the custom white balance
– [Face Registration]
• The following functions are unavailable when the [ Shutter Type] is set to
[Electronic Shutter].
– Flash shooting
– Long Exposure NR
– Bulb shooting
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
72
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Using the electronic shutter
Using the electronic shutter lets you perform various kinds of shooting
that are difficult to achieve using the mechanical shutter, such as shooting
without sounds or shaking, shooting with a super-fast shutter, and
blackout-free shooting*.
* During blackout-free shooting, the screen does not black out or drop frames
and you can keep looking at the subject through the viewfinder or monitor
while shooting images.
Shutter types and camera performance
The camera’s shutter speed range, shutter sound, occurrence of blackout,
and availability of the anti-flicker shooting or the flash for each setting are
as follows:
Shutter Type
Auto Mechanical Shutter Electronic Shutter
Shutter speed
Single shooting:
BULB – 1/32000*1*2
Continuous
shooting:
1/8 – 1/32000*1*2
Single shooting:
BULB – 1/8000
Continuous
shooting:
30 – 1/8000
Single shooting:
30 – 1/32000*1*2
Continuous
shooting:
1/8 – 1/32000*1*2
Shutter sound
Single shooting:
Mechanical shutter
sound
Continuous
shooting:
Electronic shutter
sound
Mechanical shutter
sound
Electronic shutter
sound
Blackout
Single shooting:
Occurs
Continuous
shooting: Blackout-
free*3
Occurs Blackout-free*3
Flash Available*4Available Unavailable
Anti-flicker
shooting Available*5Available Unavailable
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
73
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
*1 The maximum shutter speed is 1/16000 second when the shooting mode
is not set to S (Shutter Priority) or M (Manual Exposure), or during bracket
shooting with a setting other than [WB bracket] or [DRO Bracket].
*2 The next value after 1/16000 second is 1/32000 second when the shooting
mode is set to S (Shutter Priority) or M (Manual Exposure).
*3 When [Shoot. Start Disp.] is set to [On], blackout occurs only when the first
image is shot (page 76).
*4 The maximum shutter speed is 1/8000 second when performing continuous
shooting with the flash.
*5 The maximum shutter speed is 1/8000 second when [ Anti-flicker Shoot.]
is set to [On].
Advanced shooting using the electronic shutter: Shooting
without shutter sound
You can use the electronic shutter to shoot without shutter sound.
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ Shutter Type]
[Electronic Shutter].
• Select [Electronic Shutter] or [Auto] for continuous shooting.
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [Audio signals]
[Off] or [On: other than e-shut].
Advanced shooting using the electronic shutter: Blackout-
free continuous shooting
You can use the electronic shutter to perform continuous shooting with
focus and exposure tracking, without the screen blacking out.
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ Shutter Type]
[Auto] or [Electronic Shutter].
Turn the mode dial and select (Program Auto),
(Aperture Priority), (Shutter Priority), or
(Manual Exposure), then set the shutter speed
and aperture value. (For example: shutter speed of
1/250second and aperture value of F2.8)
• The product will not adjust the exposure in manual exposure mode
when [ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
74
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Turn the drive mode dial and select
(Continuous Shooting: Hi),
(Continuous Shooting: Mid), or
(Continuous Shooting: Lo).
Turn the focus mode dial and select AF-C (Continuous AF),
then start shooting images.
Hint
• If you want to display the timing of shooting on the screen during blackout-
free shooting, adjust the setting using MENU (Camera Settings 2)
[Shoot. Timing Disp.].
• To take advantage of the performance of the camera, we recommend that
you use a UHS-II memory card.
Note
• When shooting without the shutter sound, do so on your own responsibility,
with sufficient consideration to the privacy and portrait rights of the subject.
• Even if you set the camera to shoot without the shutter sound, it will not be
completely silent.
• Even if you set the camera to shoot without the shutter sound, the aperture
and focus will make sounds.
• When using a lens compatible with Aperture Drive in AF, sound from
the aperture drive may be audible during continuous shooting if
[Aperture Drive in AF] is set to [Focus Priority].
• If you set [Audio signals] to [Off], the camera will not beep when the subject
comes into focus or when the self-timer is in operation.
• During blackout-free shooting, the slower the shutter speed, the lower the
refresh rate of the screen. If you want the screen display to be smooth in order
to track the subject, set a shutter speed faster than 1/125 second.
• The electronic shutter operates differently when a Mount Adaptor is attached
to the camera.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
75
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Displaying the release timing (Shoot. Timing Disp.)
Sets whether or not to display marks (such as a frame) on the screen
while shooting. This function is useful in situations where it is difficult to
determine the timing of shooting just by looking at the screen, such as
when the shutter sound is turned off.
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [Shoot. Timing Disp.]
desired setting.
On: Type 1: Displays a frame (dark color) around the focusing frame.
On: Type 2: Displays a frame (light color) around the focusing frame.
On: Type 3: Displays (dark color) in the four corners of the screen.
On: Type 4: Displays (light color) in the four corners of the screen.
Off: Does not display the shutter release timing during blackout-free
shooting.
[On: Type 1]/[On: Type 2]
(Example: [Focus Area] is set to [Center])
[On: Type 3]/[On: Type 4]
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
76
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Shoot. Start Disp.
Sets whether or not to indicate the shutter release timing with a black
screen during blackout-free shooting. The black screen makes it easier to
visually confirm when the shutter is released.
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [Shoot. Start Disp.]
desired setting.
On: The screen blacks out when shooting the first image during blackout-
free shooting.
Off: The screen does not black out when shooting the first image during
blackout-free shooting.
Anti-flicker Shoot.
Detects flickering/blinking from artificial light sources such as fluorescent
lighting and times the shooting of images to moments when flickering
will have less of an impact.
This function reduces differences in the exposure and color tone caused
by flickering between the upper area and the lower area of an image shot
with fast shutter speed and during continuous shooting.
1 MENU (Camera Settings 1) [ Anti-flicker Shoot.]
[On].
Off: Does not reduce influences caused by flickering.
On: Reduces influences caused by flickering. When the camera detects
flickering while the shutter button is pressed halfway down,
(flicker icon) will be displayed.
2 Press the shutter button halfway down, and then shoot the
image.
• The product detects flickering when the shutter button is pressed
halfway down.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
77
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Hint
• The color tone of the shot result may vary when you shoot the same scene
using a different shutter speed. If that happens, we recommend that you
shoot in [Shutter Priority] or [Manual Exposure] mode with a fixed shutter
speed.
• You can perform anti-flicker shooting by pressing the AF-ON (AF On) button.
• You can perform anti-flicker shooting by pressing the shutter button halfway
down or pressing the AF-ON (AF On) button, even when in the manual focus
mode.
Note
• When you set [ Anti-flicker Shoot.] to [On], the shutter release lag may
increase slightly. In the continuous shooting mode, the shooting speed may
slow down or the interval between shots may become irregular.
• The camera detects flickering when the frequency of the light source is 100 Hz
or 120 Hz only.
• The camera cannot detect flickering depending on the light source and
shooting conditions, such as a dark background.
• Even if the camera detects flickering, the influences caused by flickering
may not be reduced enough depending on the light source or the shooting
situation. We recommend that you take test shots beforehand.
• [ Anti-flicker Shoot.] is not available when shooting in the following
situations:
– While bulb shooting
– Movie shooting mode
– When [ Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter], or [ Shutter Type] is
set to [Auto] and [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting]
• The color tone of the shot results may differ depending on the setting of
[Anti-flicker Shoot.].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
78
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
e-Front Curtain Shutter
The electronic front curtain shutter function shortens the time lag
between when the shutter button is pressed and the shutter is released.
You can use [e-Front Curtain Shutter] when [ Shutter Type] is set to
[Mechanical Shutter].
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [e-Front Curtain Shutter]
desired setting.
On: Uses the electronic front curtain shutter function.
Off: Does not use the electronic front curtain shutter function.
Note
• When you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large-aperture lens attached,
out-of-focus circle produced by the bokeh effect may get cut off because of
the shutter mechanism. If this happens, set [e-Front Curtain Shutter] to [Off].
• When a lens made by another manufacturer (including a
Minolta/Konica-Minolta lens) is used, set this function to [Off]. If you set this
function to [On], the correct exposure will not be set or the image brightness
will be uneven.
• When you shoot at high shutter speeds, the image brightness may become
uneven depending on the shooting environment. In such cases, set
[e-Front Curtain Shutter] to [Off].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
79
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Shooting with drive modes (continuous
shooting/self-timer)
Select the appropriate mode for the subject, such as single shooting,
continuous shooting or bracketing shooting.
Select the desired drive mode
by turning the drive mode dial.
• Turn the drive mode dial while
holding down the drive mode dial
lock release button.
Single Shooting: Normal
shooting mode.
Cont. Shooting: Shoots images continuously while you
press and hold down the shutter button.
Self-timer: Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated
number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
Bracket: Shoots images using the bracketing function. The
type of bracketing function can be set by selecting MENU
(Camera Settings 1) [Bracket Settings] [Bracket Type].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
80
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Continuous shooting
Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter
button.
Turn the drive mode dial and select the desired mode.
• Turn the drive mode dial while pressing the drive mode dial lock release
button.
Continuous Shooting: Hi/ Continuous Shooting: Mid/
Continuous Shooting: Lo
Shutter Type
Mechanical Shutter Auto/Electronic Shutter*1
Continuous Shooting: Hi 10 images per second
at maximum*2
20 images per second at
maximum *2*3*4
Continuous Shooting: Mid 8 images per second
at maximum*2
10 images per second at
maximum*2
Continuous Shooting: Lo 3 images per second
at maximum
5 images per second at
maximum*2
*1 The value shown is the shooting speed when [Aperture Drive in AF] is set to
[Standard]. When [Aperture Drive in AF] is set to [Focus Priority], the speed of
continuous shooting may become slower.
*2 The focus is locked to the setting in the first shot when [Aperture Drive in AF]
is set to [Standard] or [Silent Priority], and the F-value is greater than F16.
*3 When the Focus Mode is set to AF-C (Continuous AF), the speed of
continuous shooting varies depending on the attached lens. For details,
check the support page on compatible lenses.
*4 During uncompressed RAW shooting, 12 images are shot per second at
maximum.
Hint
• To continuously adjust the focus and exposure during continuous shooting,
set as follows:
– [Focus Mode]: [Continuous AF]
– [ AEL w/ shutter]: [Off] or [Auto]
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
81
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Note
• The shooting speed during continuous shooting becomes slower when
[ RAW File Type] is set to [Uncompressed].
• Continuous shooting is unavailable in the following situations:
– [Picture Effect] is set to [Rich-tone Mono.].
– [DRO/Auto HDR] is set to [Auto HDR].
• The speed of continuous shooting decreases when you shoot with a flash.
Displaying continuous shooting remaining time indicator
(Cont. Shoot. Length)
Sets whether to display an indicator of the
remaining time for which continuous shooting
can be performed at the same shooting speed.
MENU (Camera Settings 2)
[Cont. Shoot. Length] desired setting.
Always Display: Always displays the
indicator when the drive mode is set to
[Cont. Shooting].
Shoot.-Only Display: Displays the indicator only
while continuous shooting is performed.
Not Displayed: Does not display the indicator.
Hint
• When the internal camera memory for buffering is full, “SLOW” will be
displayed and the continuous shooting speed will decrease.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
82
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Self-timer
Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of
seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed. Use the
5-second/10-second self-timer when you are going to be in the picture,
and use the 2-second self-timer to reduce camera-shake caused by
pressing the shutter button.
1 Select (Self-timer) by turning the drive mode dial.
• Turn the drive mode dial while holding down the drive mode dial lock
release button.
2 MENU (Camera Settings 1) [Self-timer Type]
[Self-timer (Single)] desired mode.
The mode determines the number of seconds until a picture is taken
after the shutter button is pressed.
• The setting screen for [Self-timer Type] can be displayed by pressing
the Fn button.
Self-timer (Single): 10 sec
Self-timer (Single): 5 sec
Self-timer (Single): 2 sec
3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.
The self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and a picture is taken after
the designated number of seconds have elapsed.
Hint
• Press the shutter button again to stop the count of the self-timer.
• Select a drive mode other than (Self-timer) by turning the drive mode dial
to cancel the self-timer.
• Set [Audio signals] to [Off] to turn off the beeping sound during the self-timer
countdown.
• To use the self-timer in bracket mode, select (Bracket) by turning the drive
mode dial, then select MENU (Camera Settings 1) [Bracket Settings]
[Selftimer during Bracket].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
83
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Self-timer (Cont)
Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a
designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was
pressed. You can choose the best from multiple shots.
1 Select (Self-timer) by turning the drive mode dial.
• Turn the drive mode dial while holding down the drive mode dial lock
release button.
2 MENU (Camera Settings 1) [Self-timer Type]
[Self-timer (Cont)] desired mode.
For example, three images are shot when 10 seconds
have elapsed after the shutter button is pressed when
[Self-timer (Cont.): 10 Sec. 3 Img.] is selected.
• The setting screen for [Self-timer Type] can be displayed by pressing
the Fn button.
Self-timer (Cont.): 10 Sec. 3 Img.
Self-timer (Cont.): 10 Sec. 5 Img.
Self-timer (Cont.): 5 Sec. 3 Img.
Self-timer (Cont.): 5 Sec. 5 Img.
Self-timer (Cont.): 2 Sec. 3 Img.
Self-timer (Cont.): 2 Sec. 5 Img.
3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.
The self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and pictures are taken
after the designated number of seconds has elapsed. The designated
number of pictures are taken continuously.
Hint
• Press the shutter button again to stop the count of the self-timer.
• Select a drive mode other than (Self-timer) by turning the drive mode dial
to cancel the self-timer.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
84
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Cont. Bracket
Shoots multiple images while automatically shifting the exposure from
base to darker and then to lighter. You can select an image that suits your
purpose after recording.
1 Select (Bracket) by turning the drive mode dial.
• Turn the drive mode dial while holding down the drive mode dial lock
release button.
2 MENU (Camera Settings 1) [Bracket Settings]
[Bracket Type] [Cont. Bracket] desired mode.
For example, the camera shoots a total of three images continuously
with an exposure value shifted by plus or minus 0.3EV when
[Cont. Bracket: 0.3EV 3 Image] is selected.
• The setting screen for [Bracket Type] can be displayed by pressing the
Fn button.
3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.
• The base exposure is set at the first shot.
• Keep pressing and holding the shutter button until bracket shooting
is finished.
Note
• The last shot is shown on the auto review.
• When [ISO AUTO] is selected in [Manual Exposure] mode, the exposure is
changed by adjusting the ISO value. If a setting other than [ISO AUTO] is
selected, the exposure is changed by adjusting the shutter speed.
• When the exposure is compensated, the exposure is shifted based on the
compensated value.
• Bracket shooting is unavailable in the following shooting modes:
– [Intelligent Auto]
• When the flash is used, the product performs flash bracket shooting, which
shifts the amount of flash light even if [Cont. Bracket] is selected. Press the
shutter button for each image.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
85
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Single Bracket
Shoots multiple images while automatically shifting the exposure from
base to darker and then to lighter. You can select the image that suits your
purpose after recording.
Since a single picture is taken each time you press the shutter button, you
can adjust the focus or the composition for each shot.
1 Select (Bracket) by turning the drive mode dial.
• Turn the drive mode dial while holding down the drive mode dial lock
release button.
2 MENU (Camera Settings 1) [Bracket Settings]
[Bracket Type] [Single Bracket] desired mode.
For example, when [Single Bracket: 0.3EV 3 Image] is selected, three
images are shot one at a time with the exposure value shifted up and
down in increments of 0.3EV.
• The setting screen for [Bracket Type] can be displayed by pressing the
Fn button.
3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.
• Press the shutter button for each image.
Note
• When [ISO AUTO] is selected in [Manual Exposure] mode, the exposure is
changed by adjusting the ISO value. If a setting other than [ISO AUTO] is
selected, the exposure is changed by adjusting the shutter speed.
• When the exposure is compensated, the exposure is shifted based on the
compensated value.
• Bracket shooting is unavailable in the following situations:
– [Intelligent Auto]
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
86
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Indicator during bracket shooting
Ambient light* bracketing
3 images shifted by 0.3EV steps
Exposure compensation ±0.0EV
Flash bracketing
3 images shifted by 0.7EV steps
Flash compensation -1.0EV
Viewfinder No indicator is displayed.
Monitor
(Display All Info. or
Histogram)
Monitor
(For viewfinder)
(Upper indicator) (Lower indicator)
* Ambient light: A generic term for non-flash light including natural light, electric
bulb and fluorescent lighting. Whereas the flash light blinks for a moment,
ambient light is constant, so this kind of light is called “ambient light.”
Note
• During bracket shooting, guides equal to the number of images to be shot are
displayed over/under the bracket indicator.
• When you start single bracket shooting, the guides will disappear one by one
as the camera records images.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
87
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
WB bracket
Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according
to the selected settings for white balance, color temperature and color
filter.
1 Select (Bracket) by turning the drive mode dial.
• Turn the drive mode dial while holding down the drive mode dial lock
release button.
2 MENU (Camera Settings 1) [Bracket Settings]
[Bracket Type] [WB bracket] desired mode.
• The setting screen for [Bracket Type] can be displayed by pressing the
Fn button.
White Balance Bracket: Lo: Records a series of three images with
small changes in the white balance (within the range of 10MK-1*).
White Balance Bracket: Hi: Records a series of three images with
large changes in the white balance (within the range of 20MK-1*).
* MK-1 is the unit that indicates the capability of color temperature
conversion filters and indicates the same value as “mired.”
3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.
Note
• The last shot is shown on the auto review.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
88
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
DRO Bracket
You can record a total of three images, each at a different degree of
D-Range Optimizer value.
1 Select (Bracket) by turning the drive mode dial.
• Turn the drive mode dial while holding down the drive mode dial lock
release button.
2 MENU (Camera Settings 1) [Bracket Settings]
[Bracket Type] [DRO Bracket] desired mode.
• The setting screen for [Bracket Type] can be displayed by pressing the
Fn button.
DRO Bracket: Lo: Records a series of three images with small
changes in the D-Range Optimizer value (Lv 1, Lv 2, and Lv 3).
DRO Bracket: Hi: Records a series of three images with large
changes in the D-Range Optimizer value (Lv 1, Lv 3, and Lv 5).
3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.
Note
• The last shot is shown on the auto review.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
89
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Bracket Settings
You can set the type of bracket or the self-timer in bracket shooting
mode, and the shooting order for exposure bracketing or white balance
bracketing.
Select (Bracket) by turning the drive mode dial.
• Turn the drive mode dial while holding down the drive mode dial lock
release button.
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [Bracket Settings]
desired setting.
Bracket Type: Sets the type of bracket shooting.
(Cont. Bracket / Single Bracket / WB bracket / DRO Bracket)
Selftimer during Bracket: Sets whether to use the self-timer during
bracket shooting. Also sets the number of seconds until the shutter
is released if using the self-timer.
(OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
Bracket order: Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white
balance bracketing.
(0-+/-0+)
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
90
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Interval Shooting
You can automatically shoot a series of still images with the shooting
interval and number of shots that you set in advance (Interval shooting).
You can then create a movie from the still images produced by
interval shooting using the computer software Imaging Edge (Viewer)
(page213). You cannot create a movie from the still images on the
camera.
1 MENU (Camera Settings 1) [ Interval Shoot Func.]
[Interval Shooting] [On].
2 MENU (Camera Settings 1) [ Interval Shoot Func.]
Select the item you want to set and the desired setting.
Interval Shooting: Sets whether to perform interval shooting. ([On]/
[Off])
Shooting Start Time: Sets the time from when you press the shutter
button to when interval shooting starts. (1second to 99minutes
59seconds)
Shooting Interval: Sets the shooting interval (time from when one
exposure starts to when the exposure for the next shot starts).
(1second to 60seconds)
Number of Shots: Sets the number of shots for interval shooting.
(1shot to 9999shots)
AE Tracking Sensitivity: Sets the tracking sensitivity of the auto
exposure against the change in luminance during interval shooting.
If you select [Low], exposure changes during interval shooting will be
smoother. ([High]/[Mid]/[Low])
Shutter Type in Interval: Sets the shutter type during interval shooting.
([Mechanical Shutter]/[Electronic Shutter])
Shoot Interval Priority: Sets whether or not to prioritize the
shooting interval when the exposure mode is [Program Auto] or
[Aperture Priority] and the shutter speed becomes longer than the
time set for [Shooting Interval]. ([On]/[Off])
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
91
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
3 Press the shutter button.
When the time set for [Shooting Start Time] has elapsed, shooting will
start.
• When the number of shots set for [Number of Shots] is completed,
the camera will return to the standby screen for interval shooting.
Hint
• If you press the shutter button during interval shooting, interval shooting will
end and the camera will return to the standby screen for interval shooting.
• To go back to the normal shooting mode, select MENU
(Camera Settings 1) [ Interval Shoot Func.] [Interval Shooting]
[Off].
• If you press a key to which one of the following functions has been assigned
at the moment when shooting starts, the function will remain active during
interval shooting even without you holding down the button.
– [AEL hold]
– [ AEL hold]
– [AF/MF Control Hold]
– [Regist. AF Area hold]
– [AWB Lock Hold]
– [My Dial 1 during Hold] to [My Dial 3 during Hold]
• If you set [Display as Group] to [On], still images shot with the interval
shooting function will be displayed in groups.
• Still images shot with interval shooting can be played back continuously on
the camera (page165). If you intend to create a movie using the still images,
you can preview the result.
Note
• You may not be able to record the set number of images depending on
the remaining battery level and the amount of free space on the recording
medium. Supply power via USB while shooting, and use a memory card with
sufficient space.
• When the shooting interval is short, the camera may get hot easily.
Depending on the ambient temperature, you may not be able to record the
set number of images because the camera stops recording to protect the
equipment.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
92
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
• During interval shooting (including the time between pressing the shutter
button and the start of shooting), you cannot operate the dedicated shooting
setting screen or MENU screen. However, you can adjust some settings such
as the shutter speed with using the customized dial or control wheel.
• During interval shooting, auto review is not displayed.
• [Shutter Type in Interval] is set to [Electronic Shutter] as a default, regardless
of the setting for [ Shutter Type].
• Interval shooting is unavailable in the following situations:
– The shooting mode is set to other than P/A/S/M
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
93
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Using touch function
Touch Operation
Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor.
MENU (Setup) [Touch Operation] desired setting.
On: Activates the touch operation.
Off: Deactivates the touch operation.
Touch Panel/Pad
Touch operations when shooting with the monitor are referred to as
“touch panel operations,” and touch operations when shooting with
the viewfinder are referred to as “touch pad operations.” You can select
whether to activate touch panel operations or touch pad operations.
MENU (Setup) [Touch Panel/Pad] desired setting.
Touch Panel+Pad: Activates both the touch panel operations when
shooting with the monitor and touch pad operations when shooting
with the viewfinder.
Touch Panel Only: Activates only the touch panel operations when
shooting with the monitor.
Touch Pad Only: Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting
with the viewfinder.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
94
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Touch Focus
[Touch Focus] allows you to specify a position where you want to focus
using touch operations. This function is available when [Focus Area] is
set to a parameter other than [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot],
[Tracking: Flexible Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]. Select MENU
(Setup) [Touch Operation] [On] beforehand.
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [Func. of Touch Operation]
[Touch Focus].
Specifying the position where you want to focus in the
still image mode
You can specify the position where you want to focus using touch
operations. After touching the monitor and specifying a position, press the
shutter button halfway down to focus.
Touch the monitor.
• When shooting with the monitor, touch the position where you want
to focus.
• When shooting with the viewfinder, you can move the position of
the focus by touching and dragging on the monitor while looking
through the viewfinder.
• To cancel focusing with touch operations, touch or press the
center of the control wheel if shooting with the monitor, and press
the center of the control wheel if shooting with the viewfinder.
Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
• Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot images.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
95
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Specifying the position where you want to focus in the
movie recording mode (spot focus)
The camera will focus on the touched subject. Spot focus is not available
when shooting with the viewfinder.
Touch the subject on which you want to focus before or
during recording.
• When you touch the subject, the focus mode temporarily switches to
manual focus and the focus can be adjusted using the focus ring.
• To cancel spot focus, touch or press the center of the control wheel.
Hint
• In addition to the touch focus function, touch operations such as the following
are also available.
– When [Focus Area] is set to [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot],
[Tracking: Flexible Spot], or [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot], the focusing
frame can be moved using touch operations.
– When the [Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus], the focus magnifier can be
used by double-tapping the monitor.
Note
• The touch focus function is not available in the following situations:
– When [Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus]
– When using the digital zoom
– When using the LA-EA2 or LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)
Touch Tracking
You can use touch operations to select a subject you want to track in the
still image and movie recording modes. Select MENU (Setup)
[Touch Operation] [On] in advance.
1 MENU (Camera Settings 2) [Func. of Touch Operation]
[Touch Tracking].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
96
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
2 Touch the subject that you want to track on the monitor.
Tracking will start.
• When shooting with the viewfinder, you can use the touch pad to
select a subject you want to track.
3 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
• Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot images.
Hint
• To cancel tracking, touch or press the center of the control wheel.
Note
• [Touch Tracking] is unavailable in the following situations:
– When shooting movies with [ Record Setting] set to [120p]/[100p].
– When [Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus].
– When using the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom and Digital Zoom
– When using the LA-EA2 or LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
97
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Selecting a still image size/image quality
File Format
Sets the file format for still images.
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [ File Format] desired
setting.
RAW: Digital processing is not performed on this file format. Select this
format to process images on a computer for professional purposes.
RAW & JPEG: A RAW image and a JPEG image are created at the same
time. This is suitable when you need two image files, a JPEG for
viewing, and a RAW for editing.
JPEG: The image is recorded in the JPEG format.
About RAW images
• To open a RAW image file recorded with this camera, the software
Imaging Edge (page213) is needed. With Imaging Edge, you can open
a RAW image file, then convert it into a popular image format such as
JPEG or TIFF, or readjust the white balance, saturation or contrast of the
image.
• You cannot apply [Auto HDR] or [Picture Effect] functions with RAW
images.
• RAW images recorded with this camera have a resolution of 14 bits
per pixel. However, the resolution is limited to 12 bits in the following
shooting modes:
– [ Long Exposure NR]
– [BULB]
– Continuous shooting when [ RAW File Type] is set to [Compressed]
• You can set whether RAW images are compressed or uncompressed
using [ RAW File Type].
Note
• If you do not intend to edit the images on your computer, we recommend that
you record in JPEG format.
• You cannot add DPOF (print order) registration marks to RAW images.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
98
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
RAW File Type
Selects the file type for RAW images.
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [ RAW File Type]
desired setting.
Compressed: Records images in compressed RAW format. Records
images in compressed RAW format. The file size of the image will be
approximately half of that with [Uncompressed].
Uncompressed: Records images in uncompressed RAW format. When
[Uncompressed] is selected for [ RAW File Type], the file size of the
image will be larger than if it were recorded in compressed RAW format.
Note
• When [Uncompressed] is selected for [ RAW File Type], the icon on
the screen switches to . is also displayed while an image shot in
uncompressed RAW format is played back.
JPEG Quality
Selects the JPEG image quality when [ File Format] is set to
[RAW & JPEG] or [JPEG].
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [ JPEG Quality] desired
setting.
Extra fine/Fine/Standard: Since the compression rate increases from
[Extra fine] to [Fine] to [Standard], the file size decreases in the same
order. This allows more files to be recorded on one memory card, but
the image quality is lower.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
99
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
JPEG Image Size
The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the
image is printed on large-format paper. The smaller the image size, the
more images can be recorded.
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [ JPEG Image Size]
desired setting.
When recording in the full-frame size
When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 3:2 When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 4:3
L: 24M 6000×4000 pixels L: 21M 5328×4000 pixels
M: 10M 3936×2624 pixels M: 9.2M 3488×2624 pixels
S: 6.0M 3008×2000 pixels S: 5.3M 2656×2000 pixels
When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 16:9 When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 1:1
L: 20M 6000×3376 pixels L: 16M 4000×4000 pixels
M: 8.7M 3936×2216 pixels M: 6.9M 2624×2624 pixels
S: 5.1M 3008×1688 pixels S: 4.0M 2000×2000 pixels
When recording in the APS-C-equivalent size
When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 3:2 When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 4:3
L: 10M 3936×2624 pixels L: 9.2M 3488×2624 pixels
M: 6.0M 3008×2000 pixels M: 5.3M 2656×2000 pixels
S: 2.6M 1968×1312 pixels S: 2.3M 1744×1312 pixels
When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 16:9 When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 1:1
L: 8.7M 3936×2216 pixels L: 6.9M 2624×2624 pixels
M: 5.1M 3008×1688 pixels M: 4.0M 2000×2000 pixels
S: 2.2M 1968×1112 pixels S: 1.7M 1312×1312 pixels
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
100
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Note
• When [ File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], the image size for
RAW images corresponds to “L.”
Aspect Ratio
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [ Aspect Ratio] desired
setting.
3:2: Same aspect ratio as 35 mm film
4:3: The aspect ratio is 4:3.
16:9: The aspect ratio is 16:9.
1:1: The horizontal and vertical ratio is equal.
APS-C/Super 35mm
Sets whether to record in APS-C-equivalent size for still images and in
Super 35mm-equivalent size for movies. If you select [On] or [Auto], you
can use an APS-C size dedicated lens on this product.
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [APS-C/Super 35mm]
desired setting.
On: Records in either APS-C-equivalent size or Super 35mm-equivalent
size.
Auto: Automatically sets the capture range according to the lens.
Off: Always captures 35mm full-frame image sensor pictures.
Note
• When you attach an APS-C compatible lens and set [APS-C/Super 35mm] to
[Off], you may not achieve the desired shooting results.
• When you set [APS-C/Super 35mm] to [On], the angle of view will be the
same as when shooting with an APS-C size image sensor.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
101
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Selecting a shooting mode
List of mode dial function
You can switch the shooting mode according to the subject or purpose of
shooting.
Turn the mode dial to select
the desired shooting mode.
• Turn the mode dial while
pressing the mode dial lock
release button in the center of
the mode dial.
Available functions
(Intelligent Auto) Allows you to shoot with automatic scene
recognition.
(Program Auto) Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted
automatically (both the shutter speed and the
aperture value (F value)). Also you can select
various settings using the menu.
(Aperture Priority) Allows you to adjust the aperture and shoot
when you want to blur the background, etc.
(Shutter Priority) Allows you to shoot fast-moving subjects etc., by
manually adjusting the shutter speed.
(Manual Exposure) Allows you to shoot still images with the desired
exposure by adjusting the exposure (both the
shutter speed and the aperture value (F value)).
1/2/3 (Memory recall) Allows you to shoot an image after recalling
often-used modes or numeric settings registered
in advance.
(Movie) Allows you to change the exposure mode for
movie recording.
(S&Q Motion) Allows you to shoot slow-motion and quick-
motion movies.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
102
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
( Intelligent Auto)
The camera shoots with automatic scene recognition.
1 Set the mode dial to (Auto Mode).
The shooting mode will be set to (Intelligent Auto).
2 Point the camera at the
subject.
When the camera recognized the
scene, the icon for the recognized
scene appears on the screen.
3 Adjust the focus and shoot the image.
Note
• The product will not recognize the scene when you shoot images with zoom
functions other than optical zoom.
• The product may not properly recognize the scene under certain shooting
conditions.
• For [Intelligent Auto] mode, most of the functions are set automatically, and
you cannot adjust the settings on your own.
About Scene Recognition
Scene Recognition operates in [Intelligent Auto] mode. This function
allows the product to automatically recognize the shooting conditions and
shoot the image.
Scene Recognition
When the product recognizes certain scenes, the following icons and
guides are displayed on the first line:
(Portrait), (Infant), (Night Portrait), (Night Scene),
(Backlight Portrait), (Backlight), (Landscape), (Macro),
(Spotlight), (Low Light), (Night Scene using a tripod)
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
103
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Program Auto
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the
shutter speed and the aperture value).
You can set shooting functions such as [ISO].
1 Set the mode dial to (Program Auto).
2 Set the shooting functions to your desired settings.
3 Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.
Program Shift
When you are not using a flash, you can change the shutter speed
and aperture (F-value) combination without changing the appropriate
exposure set by the camera.
Turn the front/rear dial to select the aperture value and shutter speed
combination.
• “P” on the screen changes to “P ” when you turn the front/rear dial.
• To cancel program shift, set the shooting mode to other than
[Program Auto], or turn off the camera.
Note
• According to the brightness of the environment, the program shift may not
be used.
• Set the shooting mode to another one than “P” or turn off the power to cancel
the setting you made.
• When the brightness changes, the aperture (F-value) and shutter speed also
change while maintaining the shift amount.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
104
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Aperture Priority
You can shoot by adjusting the aperture and changing the range in focus,
or by defocusing the background.
1 Set the mode dial to (Aperture Priority).
2 Select the desired value by turning the front/rear dial.
• Smaller F-value: The subject is in focus, but objects in front of and
beyond the subject are blurred.
Larger F-value: The subject and its foreground and background are
all in focus.
• If the aperture value you have set is not suitable for appropriate
exposure, the shutter speed on the shooting screen will blink. If this
happens, change the aperture value.
3 Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.
The shutter speed is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.
Note
• The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image
being shot.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
105
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Shutter Priority
You can express the movement of a moving subject in various ways by
adjusting the shutter speed, for example, at the instant of the movement
with high speed shutter, or as a trailing image with low speed shutter.
1 Set the mode dial to (Shutter Priority).
2 Select the desired value by turning the front/rear dial.
• If proper exposure cannot be obtained after setup, the aperture value
on the shooting screen blinks. If this happens, change the shutter
speed.
3 Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.
The aperture is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.
Hint
• Use a tripod to prevent camera-shake when you have selected a slow shutter
speed.
• When you shoot indoor sports scenes, set the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.
Note
• The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in shutter speed priority
mode.
• When [ Long Exposure NR] is set to [On] and the shutter speed is
1second(s) or longer with a [ Shutter Type] other than [Electronic Shutter]
is set, noise reduction after shooting is performed for the same amount of
time that the shutter was open. However, you cannot shoot any more while
noise reduction is in progress.
• The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image
being shot.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
106
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Manual Exposure
You can shoot with the desired exposure setting by adjusting both the
shutter speed and aperture.
1 Set the mode dial to (Manual Exposure).
2 Select the desired aperture value by turning the front dial.
Select the desired shutter speed by turning the rear dial.
• You can change the setting of the front/rear dial using MENU
(Camera Settings 2) [Dial Setup].
• You can also set [ISO] to [ISO AUTO] in manual exposure mode. The
ISO value automatically changes to achieve the appropriate exposure
using the aperture value and shutter speed you have set.
• When [ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO], the ISO value indicator will blink if
the value you have set is not suitable for appropriate exposure. If this
happens, change the shutter speed or aperture value.
• When [ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO], use MM (Metered
Manual)* to check the exposure value.
Toward +: Images become brighter.
Toward -: Images become darker.
0: Appropriate exposure analyzed by the product.
* Indicates under/over for appropriate exposure. It is displayed using
a numerical value on the monitor and with a metering indicator on
the viewfinder.
3 Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.
Hint
• You can change the shutter speed and aperture (F-value) combination
without changing the set exposure value by rotating the front/rear dial while
pressing the AEL button. (Manual shift)
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
107
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Note
• The Metered Manual indicator does not appear when [ISO] is set to
[ISO AUTO].
• When the amount of ambient light exceeds the metering range of the
Metered Manual, the Metered Manual indicator flashes.
• The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in manual exposure mode.
• The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image
being shot.
Bulb shooting
You can shoot a trailing image of the movement of a subject with long
exposure.
Bulb shooting is suitable for shooting trails from stars or fireworks, etc.
1 Set the mode dial to (Manual Exposure).
2 Turn the rear dial clockwise until [BULB] is indicated.
3 Select the aperture value (F-value) using the front dial.
4 Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
5 Press and hold the shutter button for the duration of the
shooting.
As long as the shutter button is pressed, the shutter remains open.
Hint
• When shooting fireworks, etc., focus at infinity in manual focus mode. If you
use a lens whose infinity point is unclear, adjust the focus on the fireworks in
the area you want to focus on in advance.
• In order to perform bulb shooting without causing the image quality to
deteriorate, we recommend that you start shooting while the camera is cool.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
108
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
• During bulb shooting, images tend to blur. It is recommended that you use
a tripod, a RMT-P1BT Bluetooth remote commander (sold separately) or a
remote commander equipped with a lock function (sold separately). When
using the RMT-P1BT Bluetooth remote commander, you can start bulb
shooting by pressing the shutter button on the remote commander. To stop
bulb shooting, press the shutter button on the remote commander again. To
use the other remote commander, use the model which can be connected via
the Multi/Micro USB terminal.
Note
• The longer the exposure time, the more noise will be visible on the image.
• When [ Long Exposure NR] is set to [On], noise reduction is performed
after shooting for the same duration that the shutter was open. You cannot
shoot while noise reduction is in progress.
• You cannot set the shutter speed to [BULB] in the following situations:
– [Auto HDR]
– [Picture Effect] is set to [Rich-tone Mono.]
– When [Drive Mode] is set to the following:
– [Cont. Shooting]
– [Self-timer (Cont)]
– [Cont. Bracket]
– [ Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter]
If you use the above functions when the shutter speed is set to [BULB], the
shutter speed is temporarily set to 30 seconds.
• If you set [Drive Mode] to [Cont. Shooting] and [ Shutter Type] to [Auto] or
[Electronic Shutter] when the shutter speed is set to [BULB], the shutter speed
will be temporarily set to 1/8 second.
/ Recall
Allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera
settings registered with [ / Memory] in advance (page176).
1 Set the mode dial to 1, 2, or 3 (Memory recall).
2 Press the center of the control wheel to confirm.
• You can also recall registered modes or settings by selecting MENU
(Camera Settings 1) [ / Recall].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
109
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Hint
• To recall settings registered to the memory card, set the mode dial to 1, 2, 3
(Memory recall), then select the desired number by pressing the left/right side
of the control wheel.
• If you recall settings registered to the memory card, the settings are recalled
from the memory card in the slot specified in [ Select Media]. You can
confirm the memory card slot by selecting MENU (Camera Settings 1)
[ Select Media].
• Settings registered to a memory card using another camera of the same
model name can be recalled with this camera.
Note
• If you set [ / Recall] after completing the shooting settings, the
registered settings are given priority and the original settings may become
invalid. Check the indicators on the screen before shooting.
Movie: Exposure Mode
You can set the exposure mode for movie shooting.
1 Set the mode dial to (Movie).
2 MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ Exposure Mode]
desired setting.
Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted
automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture
value manually.
Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter
speed manually.
Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the
exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
3 Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.
• Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
110
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
S&Q Motion: Exposure Mode
You can select the exposure mode for slow-motion/quick-motion
shooting. You can change the setting and playback speed for slow-
motion/quick-motion shooting with [ S&Q Settings] (page152).
1 Set the mode dial to (S&Q Motion).
2 MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ Exposure Mode]
desired setting.
Program Auto: Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted
automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).
Aperture Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the
aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter
speed manually.
Manual Exposure: Allows you to shoot after adjusting the
exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.
3 Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.
• Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
111
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Controlling the exposure/metering modes
Exposure Comp.
Normally, exposure is set automatically (auto exposure). Based on the
exposure value set by auto exposure, you can make the entire image
brighter or darker if you adjust [Exposure Comp.] to the plus side or minus
side, respectively (exposure compensation).
Release the exposure
compensation dial lock, and turn
the exposure compensation dial.
+ (over) side: Images become brighter.
- (under) side: Images become darker.
• Pressing the lock button at the center
switches the exposure compensation
dial between the locked and
unlocked status. The dial is unlocked
when the lock button is popped up
and the white line is visible.
• You can adjust the exposure
compensation value within the range
of -3.0EV to +3.0EV.
• You can confirm the exposure
compensation value that you set on
the shooting screen.
Exposure compensation dial
Exposure compensation dial
lock button
Monitor Viewfinder
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
112
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
To set the exposure compensation using the MENU
You can adjust the exposure compensation value within a range of -5.0EV
to +5.0EV when the exposure compensation dial is set to “0.”
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [Exposure Comp.]
desired setting.
Hint
• You can operate the exposure compensation dial any time you want while the
exposure compensation dial lock is released. The exposure compensation dial
lock prevents unintentional changes to exposure compensation values.
Note
• You cannot perform the exposure compensation in the following shooting
modes:
– [Intelligent Auto]
• When using [Manual Exposure], you can perform the exposure compensation
only when [ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO].
• The settings of the exposure compensation dial will be prioritized over
[Exposure Comp.] or [Dial Ev Comp] in MENU.
• Only a value between -3.0EV and +3.0EV with the equivalent image
brightness appears on the screen when shooting. If you set an exposure
compensation value outside this range, the image brightness on the screen
will not be affected, but the value will be reflected in the recorded image.
• You can adjust the exposure compensation value within the range of -2.0EV
to +2.0EV for movies.
• If you shoot a subject in extremely bright or dark conditions, or when you use
the flash, you may not be able to get a satisfactory effect.
• When you set the exposure compensation dial to “0” from a setting other
than “0,” the exposure compensation value switches to “0” regardless of the
[Exposure Comp.] setting.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
113
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Metering Mode
Selects the metering mode that sets which part of the screen to measure
for determining the exposure.
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [Metering Mode] desired
setting.
Multi: Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into
multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the entire screen
(Multi-pattern metering).
Center: Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while
emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-weighted metering).
Spot: Measures only inside the metering circle. This mode is suitable
for measuring light on a specified part of the entire screen. The size
of the metering circle can be selected from [Spot: Standard] and
[Spot: Large]. The position of the metering circle depends the setting
for [Spot Metering Point].
Entire Screen Avg.: Measures the average brightness of the entire
screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the
position of the subject changes.
Highlight: Measures the brightness while emphasizing the
highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the
subject while avoiding overexposure.
Hint
• When [Spot] is selected and [Focus Area] is set to either
[Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or
[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot] while [Spot Metering Point] is set to
[Focus Point Link], the spot metering point can be coordinated with the focus
area.
• When [Multi] is selected and [Face Priority in Multi Metering] is set to [On], the
camera measures brightness based on detected faces.
• When [Metering Mode] is set to [Highlight] and the [D-Range Optimizer]
or [Auto HDR] function is activated, the brightness and the contrast will be
corrected automatically by dividing the image into small areas and analyzing
the contrast of light and shadow. Make settings based on the shooting
circumstances.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
114
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Note
• [Metering Mode] is locked to [Multi] in the following shooting modes:
– [Intelligent Auto]
– Other zoom functions than the optical zoom
• In [Highlight] mode, the subject may be dark if a brighter part exists on the
screen.
Face Priority in Multi Metering
Sets whether the camera measures brightness based on detected faces
when [Metering Mode] is set to [Multi].
MENU (Camera Settings 1)
[Face Priority in Multi Metering] desired setting.
On: The camera measures brightness based on detected faces.
Off: The camera measures brightness using the [Multi] setting, without
detecting faces.
Note
• When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto],
[Face Priority in Multi Metering] is locked to [On].
• When [Face/Eye Priority in AF] is set to [On] and [Subject Detection] is set to
[Animal] under [Face/Eye AF Set.], [Face Priority in Multi Metering] does not
work.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
115
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Spot Metering Point
Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus
area when [Focus Area] is set to [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot],
[Tracking: Flexible Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot].
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [Spot Metering Point]
desired setting.
Center: The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus
area, but always meters brightness at the center.
Focus Point Link: The spot metering position coordinates with the focus
area.
Note
• When [Focus Area] is set to other than [Flexible Spot]/[Expand Flexible Spot]/
[Tracking: Flexible Spot]/[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot], the spot metering
position is locked to the center.
• When [Focus Area] is set to [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or
[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot], the spot metering position coordinates to
the tracking start position, but does not coordinate with the tracking of the
subject.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
116
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
AE lock
When the contrast between the subject and background is high, such
as when shooting a backlit subject or a subject near a window, meter
the light at a spot where the subject appears to have the appropriate
brightness and lock the exposure before shooting. To reduce the
brightness of the subject, meter the light at a spot brighter than the
subject and lock the exposure of the entire screen. To make the subject
brighter, meter the light at a spot darker than the subject and lock the
exposure of the entire screen.
1 Adjust the focus on the spot at which the exposure is adjusted.
2 Press the AEL button.
The exposure is locked, and (AE
lock) is displayed.
AEL button
3 Keep pressing the AEL button and focus on the subject again,
then shoot the picture.
• Keep holding the AEL button down while taking a shot if you want
to continue shooting with the fixed exposure. Release the button to
reset the exposure.
Hint
• If you select the MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ Custom Key] or
[Custom Key] [AEL Button] [AEL toggle], you can lock the exposure
without holding down the button.
Note
• [ AEL hold] and [ AEL toggle] are not available when using zoom
functions other than optical zoom.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
117
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Correcting brightness and contrast
automatically
D-Range Optimizer (DRO)
By dividing the image into small areas, the product analyzes the contrast
of light and shadow between the subject and the background, and
creates an image with the optimal brightness and gradation.
1 MENU (Camera Settings 1) [DRO/Auto HDR]
[D-Range Optimizer].
2 Select the desired setting using the left/right sides of the
control wheel.
D-Range Optimizer: Auto: Corrects the brightness automatically.
D-Range Optimizer: Lv1 — D-Range Optimizer: Lv5: Optimizes
the gradation of a recorded image for each divided area. Select the
optimization level from Lv1 (weak) to Lv5 (strong).
Note
• In the following situations, [DRO/Auto HDR] is fixed to [Off]:
– When [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off]
• When [ Record Setting] is set to [120p 100M], [100p 100M], [120p 60M],
or [100p 60M], or when [ Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps],
[DRO/Auto HDR] switches to [Off].
• When shooting with [D-Range Optimizer], the image may be noisy. Select the
proper level by checking the recorded image, especially when you enhance
the effect.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
118
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Auto HDR
Shoots three images using different exposures and combines the images
with correct exposure, the bright parts of an underexposed image, and the
dark parts of an overexposed image to create images with a greater range
of gradation (High Dynamic Range). One image with proper exposure and
one overlaid image are recorded.
1 MENU (Camera Settings 1) [DRO/Auto HDR]
[Auto HDR].
2 Select the desired setting using the left/right sides of the
control wheel.
Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. Auto: Corrects the brightness
automatically.
Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 1.0EV — Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 6.0EV:
Sets the exposure difference, based on the contrast of the subject.
Select the optimization level from 1.0EV (weak) to 6.0EV (strong).
For example, if you set the exposure value to 2.0EV, three images
will be composed with the following exposure levels: -1.0EV, correct
exposure and +1.0EV.
Hint
• The shutter is released three times for one shot. Be careful about the
following:
– Use this function when the subject is motionless or does not flash light.
– Do not change the composition before shooting.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
119
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Note
• This function is not available when the [ File Format] is [RAW] or
[RAW & JPEG].
• [Auto HDR] is not available in the following shooting modes:
– [Intelligent Auto]
• [Auto HDR] is not available in the following situations:
– When [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off].
• You cannot start the next shot until the capture process is completed after
you shoot.
• You may not obtain the desired effect depending on the luminance difference
of a subject and the shooting conditions.
• When the flash is used, this function has little effect.
• When the contrast of the scene is low or when product shake or subject blur
occurs, you may not obtain good HDR images. will be displayed over
the recorded image to inform you when the camera detects image blurring.
Change the composition or re-shoot the image carefully to avoid image blur,
as needed.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
120
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Selecting the ISO sensitivity
Sensitivity to light is expressed by the ISO number (recommended
exposure index). The larger the number, the higher the sensitivity.
ISO (ISO) on the control wheel select desired setting.
• You can also select MENU (Camera Settings 1) [ISO Setting]
[ISO].
• You can change the value by 1/3EV steps by turning the front dial as
well as by turning the control wheel. You can change the value by 1EV
steps by turning the rear dial.
ISO AUTO: Sets the ISO sensitivity automatically.
ISO 50 – ISO 204800: Sets the ISO sensitivity manually. Selecting a larger
number increases the ISO sensitivity.
Hint
• You can change the range of ISO sensitivity that is set automatically in [ISO AUTO]
mode. Select [ISO AUTO] and press the right side of the control wheel, and set the
desired values for [ISO AUTO Maximum] and [ISO AUTO Minimum].
Note
• [ISO AUTO] is selected when using the following functions:
– [Intelligent Auto]
• When the ISO sensitivity is set to a value lower than ISO 100, the range for
recordable subject brightness (dynamic range) may decrease.
• The higher the ISO value, the more noise will appear on the images.
• The available ISO settings will differ depending on whether you are shooting
still images, shooting movies, or shooting slow-motion/quick-motion movies.
• ISO values between 50 and 25600 are available in the following situations:
– [ Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].
– [ Shutter Type] is set to [Auto] and [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting].
• When shooting movies, ISO values between 100 and 102400 are available. If
the ISO value is set to a value larger than 102400, the setting is automatically
switched to 102400. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value
returns to the original setting.
• When shooting movies, ISO values between 100 and 102400 are available. If
the ISO value is set to a value smaller than 100, the setting is automatically
switched to 100. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to
the original setting.
• When you select [ISO AUTO] with the shooting mode set to [P], [A], [S] or [M],
the ISO sensitivity will be automatically adjusted within the set range.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
121
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
ISO Range Limit
You can limit the range of ISO sensitivity when the ISO sensitivity is set
manually.
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [ISO Setting]
[ISO Range Limit] [Minimum] or [Maximum], and select the
desired values.
Note
• ISO sensitivity values beyond the specified range become unavailable.
To select ISO sensitivity values beyond the specified range, reset
[ISO Range Limit].
To set the range for [ISO AUTO]
If you want to adjust the range of ISO sensitivity that is automatically
set in the [ISO AUTO] mode, select MENU (Camera Settings 1)
[ISO Setting] [ISO] [ISO AUTO], and then press the right side of the
control wheel to select [ISO AUTO Maximum]/[ISO AUTO Minimum].
ISO AUTO Min. SS
If you select [ISO AUTO] when the shooting mode is (Program Auto)
or (Aperture Priority), you can set the shutter speed at which the ISO
sensitivity starts changing.
This function is effective for shooting moving subjects. You can minimize
subject blurring while also preventing camera shake.
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [ISO Setting]
[ISO AUTO Min. SS] desired setting.
FASTER (Faster)/FAST (Fast): The ISO sensitivity will start to change at
shutter speeds faster than [Standard], so you can prevent camera shake
and subject blurring.
STD (Standard): The camera automatically sets the shutter speed based
on the focal length of the lens.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
122
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
SLOW (Slow)/SLOWER (Slower): The ISO sensitivity will start to change at
shutter speeds slower than [Standard], so you can shoot images with
less noise.
1/16000 – 30": The ISO sensitivity starts to change at the shutter speed
you have set.
Hint
• The difference in shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts to change
between [Faster], [Fast], [Standard], [Slow], and [Slower] is 1EV.
Note
• If the exposure is insufficient even when the ISO sensitivity is set to
[ISO AUTO Maximum] in [ISO AUTO], in order to shoot with an appropriate
exposure, the shutter speed will be slower than the speed set in
[ISO AUTO Min. SS].
• In the following situations, the shutter speed may not function as set:
– When the maximum shutter speed has changed based on the
[Shutter Type] setting.
– When using the flash to shoot bright scenes. (The maximum shutter speed
is limited to the flash-syncing speed of 1/250seconds.)
– When using the flash to shoot dark scenes with the [Flash Mode] set
to [Fill-flash]. (The minimum shutter speed is limited to the speed
automatically determined by the camera.)
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
123
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Using the zoom
The zoom features available with this product
The zoom feature of the product provides a higher magnification zoom
by combining various zoom features. The icon displayed on the screen
changes, according to the selected zoom feature.
When a power zoom lens is mounted:
When a lens other than a power zoom lens is mounted:
Optical zoom range
Zoom images in the zoom range of a lens. When a power zoom lens is
mounted, the zoom bar of the optical zoom range is displayed. When a
lens other than a power zoom lens is mounted, the zoom slider is fixed
at the left end of the zoom bar while the zoom position is in the optical
zoom range (displayed as ×1.0).
Smart Zoom range ( )
Zoom images without causing the original quality to deteriorate by
partially cropping an image (only when [ JPEG Image Size] is set to [M]
or [S]).
Clear Image Zoom range ( )
Zoom images using an image process with less deterioration. When you
set [Zoom Setting] to [ClearImage Zoom] or [Digital Zoom], you can use
this zoom function.
Digital Zoom range ( )
You can magnify images using an image process. When you set
[Zoom Setting] to [Digital Zoom], you can use this zoom function.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
124
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Note
• The default setting for the [Zoom Setting] is [Optical zoom only].
• The default setting for the [ JPEG Image Size] is [L]. To use the smart zoom,
change [ JPEG Image Size] to [M] or [S].
• The Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom and Digital Zoom functions are not
available when shooting in the following situations:
– [ File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG].
– [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p].
– During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with the [ Frame Rate] set
to [120fps]/[100fps]
– During continuous shooting with [ Shutter Type] set to [Auto] or
[Electronic Shutter]
• You cannot use the Smart Zoom function with movies.
• When a power zoom lens is mounted, you cannot use [Zoom] under MENU.
If you enlarge image past the optical zoom range, the product automatically
switches to another [Zoom] function than the optical zoom.
• When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, the [Focus Area]
setting is disabled and the focusing frame is shown by the dotted line. The AF
operates with priority on and around the center area.
• When you use the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom function,
[Metering Mode] is locked to [Multi].
• When using the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom function, the
following functions are not available:
– Face/Eye Priority in AF
– Face Priority in Multi Metering
– Tracking function
• To use another zoom function than the optical zoom for movies, assign
[Zoom] to the desired key using [ Custom Key] (page179).
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom (Zoom)
When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, you can
exceed the zoom range of the optical zoom.
1 MENU (Camera Settings 2) [Zoom Setting]
[ClearImage Zoom] or [Digital Zoom].
2 When a power zoom lens is mounted, move the zoom lever or
the zoom ring of the zoom lens to enlarge subjects.
• When you exceed the zoom range of the optical zoom, the camera
automatically switches to another zoom than the optical zoom.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
125
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
3 When a lens other than a power zoom lens is mounted, select
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [Zoom] desired value.
Press the center of the control wheel to exit.
• You can also assign the [Zoom] function to the desired button by
selecting MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ Custom Key] or
[Custom Key].
About zoom scale
The zoom scale that is used in combination with the zoom of the lens
changes according to the selected image size.
When [ Aspect Ratio] is [3:2]
Zoom Setting JPEG Image Size Full-frame/APS-C Zoom scale
Optical zoom only
(including smart zoom)
L — —
MFull-frame Approx. 1.5×
APS-C Approx. 1.3×
SFull-frame Approx. 2×
APS-C Approx. 2×
ClearImage Zoom
LFull-frame Approx. 2×
APS-C Approx. 2×
MFull-frame Approx. 3×
APS-C Approx. 2.6×
SFull-frame Approx. 4×
APS-C Approx. 4×
Digital Zoom
LFull-frame Approx. 4×
APS-C Approx. 4×
MFull-frame Approx. 6.1×
APS-C Approx. 5.2×
SFull-frame Approx. 8×
APS-C Approx. 8×
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
126
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
White Balance
Corrects the tone effect of the ambient light condition to record a neutral
white subject in white. Use this function when the color tones of the
image did not come out as you expected, or when you want to change
the color tones on purpose for photographic expression.
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [White Balance] desired
setting.
Auto/ Daylight/ Shade/ Cloudy/
Incandescent/ Fluor.: Warm White/ Fluor.: Cool White/
Fluor.: Day White/ Fluor.: Daylight/ Flash/
Underwater Auto: When you select a light source that illuminates
the subject, the product adjusts the color tones to suit to the selected
light source (preset white balance). When you select [Auto], the product
automatically detects the light source and adjusts the color tones.
C.Temp./Filter: Adjusts the color tones depending on the light source.
Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for photography.
Custom 1/Custom 2/Custom 3: Memorizes the basic white color
under the light conditions for the shooting environment.
Hint
• You can display the fine adjustment screen and perform fine adjustments of
the color tones as required by pressing the right side of the control wheel.
When [C.Temp./Filter] is selected, you can change the color temperature by
turning the rear dial instead of pressing the right side of the control wheel.
• If the color tones do not come out as you expected in the selected settings,
perform [WB bracket] shooting.
• or is displayed only when [Priority Set in AWB] is set to [Ambience]
or [White].
Note
• [White Balance] is fixed to [Auto] in the following shooting modes:
– [Intelligent Auto]
• If you use a mercury lamp or a sodium lamp as a light source, the accurate
white balance will not be obtained because of the characteristics of the light.
It is recommended to shoot images using a flash or select [Custom 1] to
[Custom 3].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
127
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance
(custom white balance)
In a scene where the ambient light consists of multiple types of light
sources, it is recommended to use the custom white balance in order to
accurately reproduce the whiteness. You can register 3 settings.
1 MENU (Camera Settings 1) [White Balance] Select
from among [Custom 1] to [Custom 3], and then press the right
side of the control wheel.
2 Select , and then press the center of the control wheel.
3 Hold the product so that the white area fully covers the white-
balance capture frame, and then press the center of the control
wheel.
After the shutter sound beeps, the calibrated values (Color Temperature
and Color Filter) are displayed.
• You can adjust the position of the white-balance capture frame by
pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel.
• After capturing a standard white color, you can display the fine
adjustment screen by pressing the right side of the control wheel.
You can finely adjust the color tones as needed.
4 Press the center of the control wheel.
The calibrated values will be registered. The monitor returns to the
MENU display while retaining the memorized custom white balance
setting.
• The registered custom white balance setting will remain memorized
until overwritten by another setting.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
128
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Note
• The message [Capturing of the custom WB failed.] indicates that the value is
in the unexpected range, for example when the subject is too vivid. You can
register the setting at this point, but it is recommended that you set the white
balance again. When an error value is set, the indicator turns orange on
the recording information display. The indicator will be displayed in white
when the set value is in the expected range.
• If you use a flash when capturing a basic white color, the custom white
balance will be registered with the lighting from the flash. Be sure to use a
flash whenever you shoot with recalled settings that were registered with a
flash.
Shutter AWB Lock
You can set whether or not to lock the white balance while the
shutter button is pressed when [White Balance] is set to [Auto] or
[Underwater Auto].
This function prevents unintentional changes to the white balance during
continuous shooting or when shooting with the shutter button pressed
halfway down.
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [ Shutter AWB Lock]
desired setting.
Shut. Halfway Down: Locks the white balance while the shutter button
is pressed halfway down, even in the auto white balance mode. The
white balance is also locked during continuous shooting.
Cont. Shooting: Locks the white balance to the setting in the first shot
during continuous shooting, even in the auto white balance mode.
Off: Operates with the normal auto white balance.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
129
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
About [AWB Lock Hold] and [AWB Lock Toggle]
You can also lock the white balance in the auto white balance mode
by assigning [AWB Lock Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle] to the custom key.
Select MENU (Camera Settings 2) Assign [AWB Lock Hold] or
[AWB Lock Toggle] using [ Custom Key]. If you press the assigned key
during shooting, the white balance will be locked.
The [AWB Lock Hold] function locks the white balance by stopping the
automatic white balance adjustment while the button is pressed.
The [AWB Lock Toggle] function locks the white balance by stopping the
automatic white balance adjustment after the button is pressed once.
When you press the button again, the AWB lock is released.
• If you want to lock the white balance during movie shooting in the auto
white balance mode, select MENU (Camera Settings 2) Assign
[AWB Lock Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle] using [ Custom Key].
Hint
• When you shoot with the flash while the automatic white balance is locked,
the resulting color tones may be unnatural because the white balance was
locked before the flash was emitted. In this case, set [ Shutter AWB Lock]
to [Off] or [Cont. Shooting], and do not use the [AWB Lock Hold] function or
[AWB Lock Toggle] function when shooting. Alternatively, set [White Balance]
to [Flash].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
130
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Setting how to process images
Creative Style
Allows you to set the desired image processing and finely adjust contrast,
saturation and sharpness for each image style.
1 MENU (Camera Settings 1) [Creative Style].
2 Select the desired style or [Style Box] using the top/bottom
sides of the control wheel.
Standard: For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and
beautiful colors.
Vivid: The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting
striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers,
spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
Neutral: The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting
images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing image
material to be modified with a computer.
Clear: For shooting images in clear tones with limpid colors in
highlight, suitable for capturing radiant light.
Deep: For shooting images with deep and dense colors, suitable
for capturing the solid presence of the subject.
Light: For shooting images with bright and simple colors, suitable
for capturing a refreshingly light ambience.
Portrait: For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for
shooting portraits.
Landscape: The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are
heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes
also stand out more.
Sunset: For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
Night Scene: The contrast is lowered for reproducing night scenes.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
131
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Autumn leaves: For shooting autumn scenes, vividly highlighting
the reds and yellows of changing leaves.
Black & White: For shooting images in black and white monotone.
Sepia: For shooting images in sepia monotone.
Registering preferred settings (Style Box): Select the six style
box (the boxes with numbers on the left side ( )) to register
preferred settings. Then select the desired settings using the right
button.
You can call up the same style with slightly different settings.
3 To adjust (Contrast),
(Saturation) and
(Sharpness), select the
desired item using the right/
left sides, and then select the
value using the top/bottom
sides.
4 When selecting [Style Box],
move to the right side using
the right side of the control
wheel, and then select the
desired style.
• You can call up the same style
with slightly different settings. Displayed only when
Style Box is selected
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
132
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
To set [Contrast], [Saturation] and [Sharpness]
[Contrast], [Saturation] and [Sharpness] can be adjusted for each image
style preset such as [Standard] and [Landscape], and for each [Style Box]
to which you can register preferred settings.
Select an item to be set by pressing the right/left sides of the control
wheel, then set the value using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.
Contrast: The higher the value selected, the more the difference of
light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on the
image.
Saturation: The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color.
When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is restrained and
subdued.
Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the
more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value selected,
the more the contours are softened.
Note
• [Creative Style] is fixed to [Standard] in the following situations:
– [Intelligent Auto]
– [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off].
• When this function is set to [Black & White] or [Sepia], [Saturation] cannot be
adjusted.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
133
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Color Space
The way colors are represented using combinations of numbers or the
range of color reproduction is called “color space.” You can change the
color space depending on the purpose of the image.
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [ Color Space] desired
setting.
sRGB: This is the standard color space of the digital camera. Use [sRGB]
in normal shooting, such as when you intend to print out the images
without any modification.
AdobeRGB: This color space has a wide range of color reproduction.
When a large part of the subject is vivid green or red, Adobe RGB is
effective. The file name of the recorded image starts with “_.”
Note
• [AdobeRGB] is for applications or printers that support color management
and DCF2.0 option color space. Images may not be printed or viewed in
the correct colors if you use applications or printers that do not support
Adobe RGB.
• When displaying images that were recorded with [AdobeRGB] on non-
Adobe RGB-compliant devices, the images will be displayed with low
saturation.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
134
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Reducing blur
Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot function.
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [SteadyShot] desired
setting.
On: Uses [SteadyShot].
Off: Does not use [SteadyShot]. We recommend that you set [Off] when
using a tripod, etc.
SteadyShot Settings
You can shoot with an appropriate SteadyShot setting for the attached
lens.
1 MENU (Camera Settings 2) [SteadyShot] [On].
2 [SteadyShot Settings] [SteadyShot Adjust.] desired
setting.
Auto: Performs the SteadyShot function automatically according to the
information obtained from the attached lens.
Manual: Performs the SteadyShot function according to the focal-
length set using [SteadyS. Focal Len.]. (8mm – 1000mm)
• Check the focal-length index and set the
focal-length.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
135
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Note
• The SteadyShot function may not work optimally when the power has just
been turned on, right after you point the camera towards a subject, or when
the shutter button has been pressed all the way down without stopping
halfway.
• When using a tripod, etc., make sure to turn off the SteadyShot function
because this can cause any malfunction when shooting.
• [SteadyShot Settings] will be unavailable when MENU
(Camera Settings 2) [SteadyShot] is set to [Off].
• When the camera cannot obtain focal length information from the lens, the
SteadyShot function does not work correctly. Set [SteadyShot Adjust.] to
[Manual] and set [SteadyS. Focal Len.] to match the lens you are using. The
current set value of the SteadyShot focal length will display to the side of .
• When using an SEL16F28 lens (sold separately) with a teleconverter, etc., set
[SteadyShot Adjust.] to [Manual] and set the focal length.
• When you set [SteadyShot] to [On]/[Off], the SteadyShot settings of the
camera and lens switch at the same time.
• If a lens equipped with a SteadyShot switch is attached, the settings can only
be changed using that switch on the lens. You cannot switch the settings
using the camera.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
136
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Noise reduction
Long Exposure NR
When you set the shutter speed to 1 second(s) or longer (long exposure
shooting), noise reduction is turned on for the duration that the shutter
is open. With the function turned on, the grainy noise typical of long
exposures is reduced.
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [ Long Exposure NR]
desired setting.
On: Activates noise reduction for the same duration that the shutter is
open. When noise reduction is in progress, a message appears and you
cannot take another picture. Select this to prioritize the image quality.
Off: Does not activate noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing
of shooting.
Note
• [ Long Exposure NR] is not available when [ Shutter Type] is set to
[Electronic Shutter].
• Noise reduction may not be activated even if [ Long Exposure NR] is set to
[On] in the following situations:
– [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting] or [Cont. Bracket].
• [ Long Exposure NR] cannot be set to [Off] in the following shooting
modes:
– [Intelligent Auto]
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
137
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
High ISO NR
When shooting with high ISO sensitivity, the product reduces noise that
becomes more noticeable when the product sensitivity is high.
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [ High ISO NR] desired
setting.
Normal: Activates high ISO noise reduction normally.
Low: Activates high ISO noise reduction moderately.
Off: Does not activate high ISO noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the
timing of shooting.
Note
• [ High ISO NR] is fixed to [Normal] in the following shooting modes:
– [Intelligent Auto]
• When [ File Format] is set to [RAW], this function is not available.
• [ High ISO NR] does not work for RAW images when the [ File Format]
is [RAW & JPEG].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
138
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Using flash (sold separately)
In dark environments, use the flash to light up the subject while shooting.
Also use the flash to prevent camera-shake.
For details on the flash, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.
1 Attach the flash
(sold separately) to the
product.
2 Shoot after you have turned on the flash and it is fully charged.
blinking: Charging is in progress
lit up: Charging is finished
• The available flash modes depend on the shooting mode and
function.
Note
• A flash cannot be used when [ Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].
• A flash can be used during continuous shooting with [ Shutter Type] set to
[Auto]. The mechanical shutter will be used.
• The light of the flash may be blocked if the lens hood is attached and the
lower part of a recorded image may be shaded. Remove the lens hood.
• When using the flash, stand 1 m or more away from the subject.
• You cannot use the flash when recording movies. (You can use an LED light
when using a flash (sold separately) with an LED light.)
• Before attaching/removing an accessory such as a flash to/from the Multi
Interface Shoe, turn off the product first. When attaching an accessory, make
sure that the accessory is fixed securely to the product.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
139
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
• Do not use the Multi Interface Shoe with a commercially available flash that
applies voltage of 250V or more or has the reverse polarity of the camera.
Doing so may cause a malfunction.
• You can use a flash of the reverse polarity with the Sync Terminal. Please use
a flash with a sync voltage of 400V or less.
• When shooting with the flash and the zoom is set to W, the shadow of the
lens may appear on the screen, depending on the shooting conditions. If this
happens, shoot away from the subject or set the zoom to T and shoot with
the flash again.
• The corners of a recorded image may be shaded, depending on the lens.
• When shooting with an external flash, light and dark stripes may appear on
the image if the shutter speed is set to faster than 1/4000 seconds. If this
occurs, Sony recommends shooting in the manual flash mode and setting the
flash level to 1/2 or higher.
• For details on compatible accessories for the Multi Interface Shoe, visit the
Sony website, or consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service
facility.
Flash Mode
You can set the flash mode.
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [Flash Mode] desired
setting.
Flash Off: The flash does not operate.
Autoflash: The flash works in dark environments or when shooting
towards bright light.
Fill-flash: The flash works every time you trigger the shutter.
Slow Sync.: The flash works every time you trigger the shutter. Slow
sync shooting allows you to shoot a clear image of both the subject
and the background by slowing the shutter speed.
Rear Sync.: The flash works right before the exposure is completed
every time you trigger the shutter. Rear sync shooting allows you to
shoot a natural image of the trail of a moving subject such as a moving
car or a walking person.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
140
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Note
• The default setting depends on the shooting mode.
• Some [Flash Mode] settings are not available, depending on the shooting
mode.
Flash Comp.
Adjusts the amount of flash light in a range of –3.0EV to +3.0EV.
Flash compensation changes the amount of flash light only. Exposure
compensation changes the amount of flash light along with the change of
the shutter speed and aperture.
MENU (Camera Settings 1) [Flash Comp.] desired
setting.
• Selecting higher values (+ side) makes the flash level higher, and lower
values (- side) makes the flash level lower.
Note
• [Flash Comp.] does not work when the shooting mode is set to the following
modes:
– [Intelligent Auto]
• The higher flash effect (+ side) may not be visible due to the limited amount
of flash light available, if the subject is outside the maximum range of the
flash. If the subject is very close, the lower flash effect (- side) may not be
visible.
• If you attach an ND filter to the lens or attach a diffuser or a color filter to the
flash, the appropriate exposure may not be achieved and images may turn
out dark. In this case, adjust [Flash Comp.] to the desired value.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
141
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
FEL lock
The flash level is automatically adjusted so that the subject gets the
optimum exposure during normal flash shooting. You can also set the
flash level in advance.
FEL: Flash Exposure Level
1 MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ Custom Key]
desired button, then assign the [FEL Lock toggle] function to
the button.
2 Center the subject on which
FEL is to be locked, and adjust
the focus.
3 Press the button to which [FEL Lock toggle] is registered, and
set the flash amount.
• A pre-flash flashes.
• The (FEL lock) lights up.
4 Adjust the composition and
shoot the image.
• When you want to release the
FEL lock, press the button to
which the [FEL Lock toggle] is
registered again.
Hint
• By setting [FEL Lock hold], you can hold the setting while the button is
pressed down. Also, by setting [FEL Lock/AEL hold] and [FEL Lock/AEL tggle.],
you can shoot images with the AE locked in the following situations.
– When [Flash Mode] is set to [Flash Off] or [Autoflash].
– When the flash cannot go off.
– When using an external flash that is set to manual flash mode.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
142
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Note
• The FEL lock cannot be set when a flash is not attached.
• If a flash that does not support the FEL lock is attached, an error message is
displayed.
• When both AE and FEL lock are fixed, lights up.
Wireless Flash
There are two methods for wireless flash shooting: light-signal flash
shooting that uses the light of the flash attached to the camera as a signal
light, and radio-signal flash shooting that uses wireless communication. To
perform radio-signal flash shooting, use a compatible flash or the Wireless
Radio Commander (sold separately).
For details on how to set each method, refer to the instruction manual of
the flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.
1 MENU (Camera Settings 1) [Wireless Flash] [On].
Off: Does not use the wireless flash function.
On: Uses the wireless flash function to make an external flash or flashes
emit light at a distance from the camera.
2 Remove the shoe cap from the camera, and then attach the
flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.
• When performing light-signal wireless flash shooting, set the
attached flash as the controller.
When performing radio-signal wireless flash shooting with a flash
attached to the camera, set the attached flash as the commander.
3 Set up an off-camera flash that is set to wireless mode, or that
is attached to the Wireless Radio Receiver (sold separately).
• You can perform a test flashing by assigning the [Wireless Test Flash]
function to a custom key using [ Custom Key], and then pressing
that key.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
143
Shooting
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Note
• The off-camera flash may emit light after receiving a light signal from a flash
used as the controller of another camera. If this occurs, change the channel of
your flash. For details on how to change the channel, refer to the instruction
manual for the flash.
• For the flash that is compatible with wireless flash shooting, visit the Sony
website, or consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.
Using a flash with a sync terminal cord
Open the cover of (flash sync)
terminal, and connect the cord.
(flash sync) terminal
Hint
• If the screen is too dark to check the composition, set [Live View Display] to
[Setting Effect OFF] to make it easy to check the composition when shooting
with a flash.
• Flashes that have a sync terminal with reversed polarity can be used with this
product.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
144
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\030BAS.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:22
Note
• Set the exposure mode to manual exposure (other than ISO AUTO is
recommended for ISO sensitivity), and set the shutter speed to the slower of
the following values or slower:
– 1/200seconds
– The shutter speed recommended by the flash.
• Use flashes with a sync voltage of 400V or lower.
• Turn off the flash connected to the sync cord when you connect the sync cord
to the (flash sync) terminal. Otherwise, the flash may emit light when the
sync cord is connected.
• The flash power level is set to full power. [Flash Comp.] cannot be set.
• Auto white balance function is not recommended. Use the custom white
balance function to achieve a more accurate white balance (page127).
• When a flash is connected to the (flash sync) terminal, the flash indicator will
not be displayed.
• Flash cannot be used when [ Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
Shooting movies
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\040MOV.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
GB
145
Shooting movies
Shooting movies
Shooting movies
You can record movies by pressing the MOVIE (Movie) button.
1 Press the MOVIE button to
start recording.
• Since the [MOVIE Button] is
set to [Always] in the default
setting, movie recording can
be started from any shooting
mode.
MOVIE button
2 Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.
Hint
• You can assign the start/stop movie recording function to a preferred key.
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ Custom Key] set [MOVIE] to the
preferred key.
• When you want to specify the area to be focused on, set the area using
[Focus Area].
• To keep the focus on a face, arrange the composition so that the focusing
frame and face detection frame overlap, or set the [Focus Area] to [Wide].
• You can focus quickly while shooting movies by pressing the shutter button
halfway down. (The sound of auto focus operation may be recorded in some
cases.)
• To adjust the shutter speed and aperture value to the desired settings, set the
shooting mode to (Movie) and select the desired exposure mode.
• An icon indicating that data is being written is displayed after shooting. Do
not remove the memory card while the icon is displayed.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
146
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\040MOV.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
• The following settings for still image shooting are applied to the movie
shooting:
– White Balance
– Creative Style
– Metering Mode
– Face/Eye Priority in AF
– Face Priority in Multi Metering
– D-Range Optimizer
– Lens Comp.
• You can change the settings for ISO sensitivity, exposure compensation, and
focus area while shooting movies.
• While shooting movies, the recorded image can be output without the
shooting information display by setting [HDMI Info. Display] to [Off].
Note
• The sound of the lens and the product in operation may be recorded
during movie recording. You can turn the sound off by selecting MENU
(Camera Settings 2) [Audio Recording] [Off].
• When shooting, the sound of the shoulder strap hooks (triangular hook) could
be recorded, depending on the situation used.
• To prevent the operating sound of the zoom ring from being recorded during
movie recording when a power zoom lens is used, we recommend recording
movies using the zoom lever. When you move the zoom lever, place your
finger lightly on the lever and operate it without flicking.
• The temperature of the camera tends to rise when shooting movies
continuously, and you may feel that the camera is warm. This is not a
malfunction.
Also, [Internal temp. high. Allow it to cool.] may appear. In such cases, turn
the power off and cool the camera and wait until the camera is ready to shoot
again.
• If the icon appears, the temperature of the camera has risen. Turn the
power off and cool the camera and wait until the camera is ready to shoot
again.
• For the continuous shooting time of a movie recording, refer to “Recordable
movie times” (page250). When movie recording is finished, you can record
another movie by pressing the MOVIE button again. Recording may stop to
protect the product, depending on the temperature of the product or the
battery.
• When the mode dial is set to (Movie) or or when shooting movies,
you cannot select [Tracking] for [Focus Area].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
147
Shooting movies
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\040MOV.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
• In [Program Auto] mode when shooting movies, the aperture value and the
shutter speed will be set automatically and cannot be changed. For that
reason, the shutter speed may become fast in a bright environment, and
the motion of the subject may not be recorded smoothly. By changing the
exposure mode and adjusting the aperture value and the shutter speed, the
motion of the subject can be recorded smoothly.
• When shooting movies, ISO values between ISO100 and ISO102400 are
available. If the ISO value is set to a value larger than ISO102400, the setting
is automatically switched to ISO102400. When you finish recording the movie,
the ISO value returns to the original setting.
• In movie shooting mode, ISO sensitivity can be selected from ISO100 to
ISO102400. If the ISO value is set to a value smaller than ISO100, the setting
is automatically switched to ISO100. When you finish recording the movie, the
ISO value returns to the original setting.
• In movie shooting mode, the following settings cannot be set in
[Picture Effect]. When a movie recording starts, [Off] will be set temporarily.
– Rich-tone Mono.
• The Face Detection function/Eye Detection function is not available in the
following situations.
– [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], [ Record Setting] is set to
[30p 100M]/[25p 100M] or [30p 60M]/[25p 60M], and [ 4K Output Select]
is set to [Memory Card+HDMI]
• If you point the camera at an extremely strong light source while shooting
a movie at low ISO sensitivity, the highlighted area in the image may be
recorded as a black area.
• If the display mode of the monitor is set to [For viewfinder], the display mode
will switch to [Display All Info.] when movie shooting starts.
• Use PlayMemories Home when importing XAVC S movies and AVCHD movies
to a computer.
Movie w/ shutter
You can start or stop recording movies by pressing the shutter button,
which is bigger and easier to press than the MOVIE (Movie) button.
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [Movie w/ shutter]
desired setting.
On: Enables movie recording using the shutter button when the shooting
mode is set to [Movie] or [S&Q Motion].
Off: Disables movie recording using the shutter button.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
148
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\040MOV.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Hint
• When [Movie w/ shutter] is set to [On], you can still start or stop recording
movies using the MOVIE button.
• When [Movie w/ shutter] is set to [On], you can use the shutter button to start
or stop recording movies on an external recording/playback device using
[REC Control] (page198).
Note
• When [Movie w/ shutter] is set to [On], you cannot focus by pressing the
shutter button halfway down during movie recording.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
149
Shooting movies
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\040MOV.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Changing settings for movie recording
File Format
Selects the movie file format.
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ File Format] desired
setting.
File Format Characteristics
XAVC S 4K Records movies in 4K resolution
(3840×2160). You can save movies on
a computer using the
PlayMemories Home
software.
XAVC S HD Records movies in crisper quality
than AVCHD with larger amounts
of data.
AVCHD The AVCHD format has a high
degree of compatibility with
storage devices other than
computers.
You can save movies on
a computer or create
a disc that supports
this format using the
PlayMemories Home
software.
For details on memory cards that can be used for these formats, refer to
page 248.
Note
• When [ File Format] is set to [AVCHD], the file size of movies is limited to
approx. 2GB. If the movie file size reaches approx. 2GB during recording, a
new movie file will be created automatically.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
150
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\040MOV.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Record Setting
Selects the frame rate and bit-rate for movie recording.
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ Record Setting]
desired setting.
• The higher the bit-rate, the higher the image quality.
• For estimates of the maximum recordable movie time with each
recording setting, refer to page 250.
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K]
Record Setting Bit-rate Description
30p 100M/25p 100M Approx. 100 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160
(30p/25p).
30p 60M/25p 60M Approx. 60 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160
(30p/25p).
24p 100M* Approx. 100 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (24p).
24p 60M* Approx. 60 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (24p).
* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
151
Shooting movies
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\040MOV.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD]
Record Setting Bit-rate Description
60p 50M/50p 50M Approx. 50 Mbps Records movies in 1920×1080
(60p/50p).
60p 25M/50p 25M Approx. 25 Mbps Records movies in 1920×1080
(60p/50p).
30p 50M/25p 50M Approx. 50 Mbps Records movies in 1920×1080
(30p/25p).
30p 16M/25p 16M Approx. 16 Mbps Records movies in 1920×1080
(30p/25p).
24p 50M* Approx. 50 Mbps Records movies in 1920×1080 (24p).
120p 100M/100p 100M Approx. 100 Mbps Records high-speed movies in
1920×1080 (120p/100p). You can
record movies in 120 fps or 100 fps.
• You can create smoother
slow-motion movies by using
compatible editing devices.
120p 60M/100p 60M Approx. 60 Mbps Records high-speed movies in
1920×1080 (120p/100p). You can
record movies in 120 fps or 100 fps.
• You can create smoother
slow-motion movies by using
compatible editing devices.
* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC
When [ File Format] is set to [AVCHD]
Record Setting Bit-rate Description
60i 24M (FX)/
50i 24M (FX)
24 Mbps at
maximum
Records movies in 1920×1080
(60i/50i).
60i 17M (FH)/
50i 17M (FH)
Approx. 17 Mbps
on average
Records movies in 1920×1080
(60i/50i).
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
152
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\040MOV.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Note
• Creating an AVCHD recording disc from movies that were recorded with
[60i 24M (FX)]/[50i 24M (FX)] as the [ Record Setting] takes a long time
because the image quality of movies is converted. If you want to store movies
without converting them, use a Blu-ray Disc.
• [120p]/[100p] cannot be selected for the following settings.
– [Intelligent Auto]
• In full-frame shooting, the angle of view will be narrower under the following
conditions:
– When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [ Record Setting] is set
to [30p]
S&Q Settings
You can record a moment that cannot be captured by the naked eye
(slow-motion recording), or record a long-term phenomenon into a
compressed movie (quick-motion recording). For example, you can record
an intense sports scene, the moment when a bird starts to fly, a blooming
flower, and a changing view of clouds or a starry sky. Sound will not be
recorded.
1 Set the mode dial to (S&Q Motion).
2 Select MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ Exposure Mode]
and select the desired setting of slow-motion/quick-motion
(Program Auto, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or
Manual Exposure).
3 Select MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ S&Q Settings]
and select the desired settings for [ Record Setting] and
[ Frame Rate].
Record Setting: Selects the frame rate of the movie.
Frame Rate: Selects the shooting frame rate.
4 Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.
• Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
153
Shooting movies
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\040MOV.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Playback speed
The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned
[Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].
When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC
Frame Rate Record Setting
24p 30p 60p
120fps 5 times slower 4 times slower —
60fps 2.5 times slower 2 times slower Normal playback
speed
30fps 1.25 times slower Normal playback
speed 2 times quick
15fps 1.6 times quick 2 times quick 4 times quick
8fps 3 times quick 3.75 times quick 7.5 times quick
4fps 6 times quick 7.5 times quick 15 times quick
2fps 12 times quick 15 times quick 30 times quick
1fps 24 times quick 30 times quick 60 times quick
When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL
Frame Rate Record Setting
25p 50p
100fps 4 times slower —
50fps 2 times slower Normal playback speed
25fps Normal playback speed 2 times quick
12fps 2.08 times quick 4.16 times quick
6fps 4.16 times quick 8.3 times quick
3fps 8.3 times quick 16.6 times quick
2fps 12.5 times quick 25 times quick
1fps 25 times quick 50 times quick
• When [ Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps], you cannot set
[Record Setting] to [60p]/[50p].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
154
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\040MOV.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Note
• In slow-motion recording, the shutter speed becomes faster and you may not
be able to obtain the proper exposure. If this happens, decrease the aperture
value or adjust the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.
• For an estimation of recordable time, refer to “Recordable movie times”
(page250).
• The bit-rate of a recorded movie varies depending on the settings for
[Frame Rate] and [ Record Setting].
• The movie will be recorded in XAVC S HD format.
• During slow-motion/quick-motion recording, the following functions are not
available.
– [TC Run] under [TC/UB Settings]
– [ TC Output] under [HDMI Settings]
– [ 4K Output Select]
Audio Recording
Sets whether to record sounds when shooting movies. Select [Off] to
avoid recording the sounds of the lens and the camera operating.
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [Audio Recording]
desired setting.
On: Records sound (stereo).
Off: Does not record sound.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
155
Shooting movies
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\040MOV.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Audio Rec Level
You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.
1 MENU (Camera Settings 2) [Audio Rec Level].
2 Select the desired level using the right/left sides of the control
wheel.
+: Turns up the audio recording level.
-: Turns down the audio recording level.
Reset: Resets the audio recording level to the default setting.
Hint
• When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to
a lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record more realistic audio.
When you record audio movies with lower volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a
greater sound level to make the sound easier to hear.
Note
• Regardless of the [Audio Rec Level] settings, the limiter always operates.
• [Audio Rec Level] is available only when the shooting mode is set to movie
mode.
• [Audio Rec Level] is unavailable during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.
• The [Audio Rec Level] settings are applied for both the internal microphone
and the (microphone) terminal input.
• The setting for [Audio Rec Level] does not apply to recordings made using
[Voice Memo].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
156
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\040MOV.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Marker Settings
Marker Display
Sets whether or not to display markers set using [ Marker Settings] on
the monitor or the viewfinder while shooting movies.
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ Marker Display]
desired setting.
On: Markers are displayed. The markers are not recorded.
Off: No marker is displayed.
Note
• The markers are displayed when the mode dial is set to (Movie) or , or
when shooting movies.
• You cannot display markers when using [Focus Magnifier].
• The markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder. (You cannot output
the markers.)
Marker Settings
Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies.
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ Marker Settings]
desired setting.
Center: Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of
the shooting screen.
[Off]/ [On]
Aspect: Sets the aspect marker display.
[Off]/ [4:3]/ [13:9]/ [14:9]/ [15:9]/ [1.66:1]/ [1.85:1]/ [2.35:1]
Safety Zone: Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard
range that can be received by a general household TV.
[Off]/ [80%]/ [90%]
Guideframe: Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can
verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.
[Off]/ [On]
Hint
• You can display several markers at the same time.
• Place the subject on the cross point of the [Guideframe] to make a balanced
composition.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
157
Shooting movies
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\040MOV.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
4K Output Select
You can set how to record movies and perform HDMI output when your
camera is connected to 4K-compatible external recording/playback
devices, etc.
1 Turn the mode dial to (Movie).
2 Connect the camera to the desired device via an HDMI cable.
3 MENU (Setup) [ 4K Output Select] desired setting.
Memory Card+HDMI: Simultaneously outputs to the external
recording/playback device and records on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only (30p): Outputs a 4K movie in 30p to the external recording/
playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only (24p): Outputs a 4K movie in 24p to the external recording/
playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.
HDMI Only (25p)*: Outputs a 4K movie in 25p to the external
recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s
memory card.
* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL.
Note
• This item can be set only when the camera is in movie mode and connected
to a 4K-compatible device.
• When [HDMI Only (30p)], [HDMI Only (24p)] or [HDMI Only (25p)] is set,
[HDMI Info. Display] will temporarily be set to [Off].
• A 4K movie is not output to the connected 4K-compatible device during slow-
motion/quick-motion shooting.
• When [HDMI Only (30p)], [HDMI Only (24p)] or [HDMI Only (25p)] is set, the
counter does not move forward (the actual recording time is not counted)
while the movie is being recorded on an external recording/playback device.
• When shooting 4K movies using the setting [Memory Card+HDMI], the
movies will not be output to a device connected by HDMI cable if you
simultaneously record a proxy movie. If you want to perform HDMI output,
set [ Proxy Recording] to [Off]. (In this case, if you set [ Record Setting]
to other values except [24p], the image will not be displayed on the screen of
the camera).
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
158
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\040MOV.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
• When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and the camera is connected via
HDMI, the following functions are partially restricted.
– [Face/Eye Priority in AF]
– [Face Priority in Multi Metering]
– Tracking function
Proxy Recording
Sets whether to simultaneously record low-bit-rate proxy movies when
recording XAVC S movies.
Since proxy movies are small in file size, they are suitable for transferring
to smartphones or uploading to websites.
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ Proxy Recording]
desired setting.
On: Proxy movies are simultaneously recorded.
Off: Proxy movies are not recorded.
Hint
• Proxy movies are recorded in the XAVC S HD format (1280×720) at 9 Mbps. The
frame rate of the proxy movie is the same as that of the original movie.
• Proxy movies are not displayed on the playback screen (single-image
playback screen or image index screen). is displayed over movies for
which a proxy movie was simultaneously recorded.
Note
• Proxy movies cannot be played back on this camera.
• Proxy recording is not available in the following situations.
– When [ File Format] is set to [AVCHD]
– When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Record Setting] is set
to [120p]/[100p]
• Deleting/protecting movies that have proxy movies removes/protects both
the original and proxy movies. You cannot delete/protect only original movies
or proxy movies.
• Movies cannot be edited on this camera.
• For details on memory cards that can be used, refer to page248.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
Viewing
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\050PLY.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
GB
159
Viewing
Viewing
Viewing images
Playing back still images
Plays back the recorded images.
1 Press the (Playback) button to switch to the playback mode.
2 Select the image with the control wheel.
• Images shot with continuous shooting or interval shooting are
displayed as one group. To play back the images in the group, press
the center of the control wheel.
Hint
• The product creates an image database file on a memory card to record and
play back images. An image that is not registered in the image database
file may not be played back correctly. To play back images shot using other
devices, register those images to the image database file using MENU
(Setup) [Recover Image DB].
• If you play back the images right after continuous shooting, the monitor may
display an icon indicating that data is being written/the number of images
left to write (page233). During writing, some functions are not available.
• You can also enlarge an image by double-tapping the monitor. In addition,
you can drag and move the magnified position on the monitor. Set
[Touch Operation] to [On] beforehand.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
160
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\050PLY.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Enlarging an image being played back ( Enlarge Image)
Enlarges the image being played back. Use this function to check the
focus of the image, etc.
1 Display the image you want to enlarge, and then press the
button.
• Turn the control wheel to adjust the zoom scale. By rotating the front/
rear dial, you can switch to the previous or next image while keeping
the same zoom scale.
• The view will zoom in on the part of the image where the camera
focused during shooting. If the focus location information cannot be
obtained, the camera will zoom in on the center of the image.
2 Select the portion you want to enlarge by pressing the top/
bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel.
3 Press the MENU button or the center of the control wheel to exit
the playback zoom.
Hint
• You can also enlarge an image being played back using MENU.
• You can change the initial magnification and initial position of enlarged
images by selecting MENU (Playback) [ Enlarge Initial Mag.] or
[Enlarge Initial Position].
• You can also enlarge an image by double-tapping the monitor. In addition,
you can drag and move the magnified position on the monitor. Set
[Touch Operation] to [On] beforehand.
Note
• You cannot enlarge movies.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
161
Viewing
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\050PLY.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Rotating recorded images automatically
(Display Rotation)
Selects the orientation when playing back recorded images.
MENU (Playback) [Display Rotation] desired setting.
Auto: When you rotate the camera, the displayed image rotates
automatically by detecting the orientation of the camera.
Manual: Images shot vertically are displayed vertically. If you have set
the image orientation using the [Rotate] function, the image will be
displayed accordingly.
Off: Images are always displayed horizontally.
Note
• Movies shot vertically are played back horizontally on the monitor or the
viewfinder of the camera during movie playback.
Playing back movies
Plays back the recorded movies.
1 Press the (Playback) button to switch to playback mode.
2 Select the movie to be played back using the control wheel and
press the center of the control wheel to start playback.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
162
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\050PLY.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Available operations during movie playback
You can perform slow playback and sound volume adjustment, etc. by
pressing the down side of the control wheel.
Operation
panel
Available operation
Playback
Pause
Fast-forward
Fast-rewind
Forward slow playback
Reverse slow playback
Next movie file
Previous movie file
Operation
panel
Available operation
Displays the next frame
Displays the previous
frame
Photo Capture
Sound volume
adjustment
Closes the operation
panel
Hint
• “Forward slow playback,” “Reverse slow playback,” “Displays the next frame”
and “Displays the previous frame” are available during pause.
• Movie files recorded using other products may not be able to be playable on
this camera.
Note
• Movies shot vertically are played back horizontally on the monitor or the
viewfinder of the camera during movie playback.
Photo Capture
Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First shoot
a movie, then pause the movie during playback to capture decisive
moments that tend to be missed when shooting still images, and save
them as still images.
1 Display the movie that you want to capture as a still image.
2 MENU (Playback) [Photo Capture].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
163
Viewing
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\050PLY.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
3 Play back the movie and pause it.
4 Find the desired scene using forward slow playback, reverse
slow playback, displays the next frame, and displays the
previous frame, and then stop the movie.
5 Press (Photo Capture) to capture the chosen scene.
The scene is saved as a still image.
Playing back images on the image index screen
(Image Index)
You can display multiple images at the same time in playback mode.
1 Press the (Image Index) button while the image is being
played back.
2 Select the image by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of
the control wheel or turning the control wheel.
To change the number of images to be displayed
MENU (Playback) [Image Index] desired setting.
9 Images/25 Images
To return to single-image playback
Select the desired image and press the center of the control wheel.
To display a desired image quickly
Select the bar on the left of the image index screen using the control
wheel, then press the top/bottom sides of the control wheel. While
the bar is being selected, you can display the calendar screen or folder
selection screen by pressing the center. In addition, you can switch View
Mode by selecting an icon.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
164
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\050PLY.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Setting the method for jumping between images
(Image Jump Setting)
Sets which dial and method to use for jumping between images during
playback. This function is useful when you want to find one of many
recorded images. You can also quickly find protected images or images
set with a particular rating (page170).
MENU (Playback) [Image Jump Setting] desired item.
Select Dial: Selects the dial to use for jumping between images.
Image Jump Method: Sets the method for playing back with Image Jump.
Note
• A group is counted as an image when [Image Jump Method] is set to
[One by one], [By 10 images], or [By 100 images].
• When [Image Jump Method] is set to a parameter other than [One by one],
[By 10 images], or [By 100 images], Image Jump will only be available if
[View Mode] is set to [Date View]. If [View Mode] is not set to [Date View], the
camera will always play back every image without jumping when you use the
dial selected with [Select Dial].
• When you use the Image Jump function and [Image Jump Method] is set to a
parameter other than [One by one], [By 10 images], or [By 100 images], movie
files are always skipped.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
165
Viewing
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\050PLY.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)
Sets the View Mode (image display method).
MENU (Playback) [View Mode] desired setting.
Date View: Displays the images by date.
Folder View (Still): Displays only still images.
AVCHD View: Displays only AVCHD-format movies.
XAVC S HD View: Displays only XAVC S HD-format movies.
XAVC S 4K View: Displays only XAVC S 4K-format movies.
Cont. PB for Interval
Continuously plays back images shot using interval shooting (page90).
You can create movies from still images produced by interval shooting
using the computer software Imaging Edge (Viewer). You cannot create
movies from the still images on the camera.
1 MENU (Playback) [Cont. PB for Interval].
2 Select the image group that you want to play back, and then
press the center of the control wheel.
Hint
• On the playback screen, you can start continuous playback by pressing the
down button while displaying an image in the group.
• You can resume play or pause by pressing the down button during playback.
• You can change the playback speed by turning the front/rear dial or the
control wheel during playback. You can also change the playback speed by
selecting MENU (Playback) [PB Speed for Interval].
• You can continuously play back images shot with continuous shooting as well.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
166
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\050PLY.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Selecting which memory card to play back
(Select Playback Media)
Selects the memory card slot to be played back.
MENU (Playback) [Select Playback Media] desired
slot.
Slot 1: Selects the slot 1.
Slot 2: Selects the slot 2.
Note
• No image is played back when no memory card is inserted in the selected
slot. Select a slot into which a memory card has been inserted.
• When you select [Date View] in [View Mode], the camera only plays back
images from a memory card selected using [Select Playback Media].
Copying images from one memory card to another (Copy)
You can copy images from a memory card in a slot that is selected using
[Select Playback Media] to a memory card in another slot.
MENU (Playback) [Copy].
All of the contents with a date or in a folder currently being played back
will be copied to a memory card in another slot.
Hint
• You can select the type of images to be displayed by selecting MENU
(Playback) [View Mode].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
167
Viewing
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\050PLY.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Note
• If images in a group are copied, the copied images will not be displayed as a
group on the destination memory card.
• If protected images are copied, the protection will be canceled on the
destination memory card.
• It may take a long time when many images are to be copied. Use a sufficiently
charged battery pack.
• XAVC S movies can only be copied to a memory card that supports XAVC S
movies. A message will be displayed on the monitor of the camera when
images cannot be copied.
Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)
Automatically plays back images continuously.
1 MENU (Playback) [Slide Show] desired setting.
Repeat: Select [On], in which images are played back in a continuous
loop, or [Off], in which the product exits the slideshow when all the
images are played back once.
Interval: Select the display interval for images from among [1 Sec],
[3 Sec], [5 Sec], [10 Sec] or [30 Sec].
2 Select [Enter].
To quit the slideshow in the middle of playback
Press the MENU button to quit the slideshow. You cannot pause the
slideshow.
Hint
• During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing the
right/left side of the control wheel.
• You can activate a slideshow only when [View Mode] is set to [Date View] or
[Folder View (Still)].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
168
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\050PLY.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Protecting images (Protect)
Protects recorded images against accidental erasure. The mark is
displayed on protected images.
MENU (Playback) [Protect] desired setting.
Multiple Img.: Applies or cancels the protection of the selected multiple
images.
All in this Folder: Protects all images in the selected folder.
All with this date: Protects all images taken on the selected date.
Cancel All in this Folder: Cancels the protection of all images in the
selected folder.
Cancel All with this date: Cancels the protection of all images taken on
the selected date.
All Images in This Group: Protects all the images in the selected group.
Cancel All in This Group: Cancels the protection of all the images in the
selected group.
Hint
• If you assign [Protect] to the key of your choice using MENU
(Camera Settings2) [ Custom Key], you can protect images
or cancel protection by simply pressing the key. The [Protect] function is
assigned to the C3 button in the default settings.
• If you select a group in [Multiple Img.], all the images in the group will be
protected. To select and protect particular images within the group, execute
[Multiple Img.] while displaying the images within the group.
Note
• The menu items that can be selected vary according to the [View Mode]
setting and the selected content.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
169
Viewing
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\050PLY.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Multiple Img.
Select the image to be protected, then press the center of
the control wheel. The mark is displayed in the check
box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to
remove the mark.
To protect other images, repeat step .
MENU [OK].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
170
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\050PLY.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Setting rating function
You can assign ratings to recorded images on a scale from to
to make it easier to find images. Combining this function with
[Image Jump Setting] allows you to find a desired image quickly.
1 MENU (Playback) [Rating].
The image rating selection screen will appear.
2 Press the left/right sides of the control wheel to display an
image to which you want to assign a rating, and then press the
center.
3 Select the number of (Rating) by pressing the left/right sides
of the control wheel, and then press the center.
4 Press the MENU button to exit the rating setting screen.
Hint
• You can also assign ratings when playing back images by using the custom
key. Assign [Rating] to the desired key using [ Custom Key] beforehand,
and then press the custom key while playing back an image to which you
want to assign a rating. The number of (Rating) changes each time you
press the custom key.
Note
• You can assign ratings to still images only.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
171
Viewing
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\050PLY.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Rating Set (Custom Key)
Sets the available number of when rating images with the key to which
you have assigned [Rating] using [ Custom Key].
MENU (Playback) [Rating Set (Custom Key)].
Add a mark to the number of that you want to
activate.
You can select the checked number when setting [Rating] using the
custom key.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
172
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\050PLY.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Attaching audio files to images
(Voice Memo)
You can record shooting conditions or image descriptions with your voice,
and attach the audio file to images as voice memos.
Voice memos can be transferred to a computer together with images, and
played back on the computer.
1 MENU (Playback) [Voice Memo].
The image selection screen will appear.
2 Select a still image to which you want to attach a voice memo.
3 While pressing the center of the control wheel, record your
voice.
A voice memo file (.WAV) with the same file name as the still image will
be saved in the folder where the corresponding still image is saved.
• Recording continues while the center of the control wheel is pressed.
The recording stops when the button is released.
To play back voice memos
MENU (Playback) [Voice Memo].
Select a still image to which a voice memo you want to
play back is attached.
• is displayed on still images having attached voice memos.
Press the center of the control wheel.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
173
Viewing
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\050PLY.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
To delete voice memos
MENU (Playback) [Voice Memo].
Select a still image to which a voice memo you want to
delete is attached.
Press the bottom of the control wheel, and then select
[OK].
Hint
• If you assign [Voice Memo hold] to a custom key using [ Custom Key], a
voice memo will be recorded while the key is being pressed. If you assign
[Voice Memo toggle] to a custom key, voice memo recording will start when
you press the key, and stop when you press the key again. During voice memo
playback, playback will start when the key is pressed, and stop when it is
pressed again.
• You can still record a voice memo for a protected still image.
Note
• You cannot attach a voice memo to a movie.
• One voice memo file of up to 60seconds in duration can be attached per still
image.
• You cannot add another voice memo to a still image to which a voice memo
has already been attached, or overwrite the content of a voice memo that has
already been attached. First delete the attached voice memo, and then record
a new voice memo.
• You cannot change the microphone input level for recording.
• The built-in microphone is used for voice memo recording. You cannot use an
external audio input device.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
174
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\050PLY.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Deleting images
Deleting a displayed image
You can delete an image displayed. Once you have deleted an image, you
cannot restore it. Confirm the image to be deleted beforehand.
1 Display the image you want to delete.
2 Press the (Delete) button.
3 Select [Delete] using the control wheel.
• If a voice memo is attached to the image to be deleted, select
[Delete image and voice memo].
Note
• The protected images cannot be deleted.
Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)
You can delete multiple selected images. Once you have deleted an
image, you cannot restore it. Confirm the image to be deleted beforehand.
MENU (Playback) [Delete] desired setting.
Multiple Img.: Deletes the selected images.
All in this Folder: Deletes all images in the selected folder.
All with this date: Deletes all images taken on the selected date.
All Other Than This Img.: Deletes all images in the group except the
selection.
All Images in This Group: Deletes all images in the selected group.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
175
Viewing
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\050PLY.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Hint
• Perform [Format] to delete all images, including protected images.
• To display the desired folder or date, select the desired folder or date during
playback by performing the following procedure:
(Image Index) button select the bar on the left using the control wheel
select the desired folder or date using the top/bottom sides of the control
wheel.
• If you select a group in [Multiple Img.], all the images in the group will be
deleted. To select and delete particular images within the group, execute
[Multiple Img.] while displaying the images within the group.
Note
• The protected images cannot be deleted.
• The menu items that can be selected vary according to the [View Mode]
setting and the selected content.
Multiple Img.
Select the images to be deleted, then press the center of
the control wheel. The mark is displayed in the check
box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to
remove the mark.
To delete other images, repeat step .
MENU [OK].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
176
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Customizing the camera
Registering frequently used functions
/ Memory
Allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings to the
product and up to 4 (M1 through M4) to the memory card. You can recall
the settings using just the mode dial.
1 Set the product to the setting you want to register.
2 MENU (Camera Settings 1) [ / Memory]
desired number.
3 Press the center of the control wheel to confirm.
Items that can be registered
• You can register various functions for shooting. The items that can
actually be registered are displayed on the menu of the camera.
• Aperture (F number)
• Shutter speed
To change registered settings
Change the setting to the desired one and re-register the setting to the
same mode number.
Note
• M1 through M4 can be selected only when a memory card is inserted into the
product.
• When registering the settings on a memory card, only a memory card that has
been selected using [ Select Media] can be used.
• Program Shift cannot be registered (page 103).
• For some functions, the position of the dial and the setting actually used for
shooting may not match. If this happens, shoot images by referring to the
information displayed on the monitor.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
Customizing the camera
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Customizing the camera
GB
177
Registering shooting settings to a custom key
(Reg. Custom Shoot Set)
You can register shooting settings (such as exposure, focus setting, drive
mode, etc.) to a custom key in advance and temporarily recall them while
holding down the key. Simply press the custom key to switch the settings
quickly and release the key to go back to the original settings. This
function is useful when recording active scenes such as sports.
1 MENU (Camera Settings 1) [Reg. Custom Shoot Set]
Select a registration number from [Recall Custom hold 1] to
[Recall Custom hold 3].
The setting screen for the selected number will be displayed.
2 Using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel,
select the check boxes for the functions that you want to recall
with one of the registration numbers and press the center to
check each box.
A mark will be displayed in the boxes for the functions.
• To cancel a selection, press the center again.
3 Select the function that you want to adjust using the top/
bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, and press the
center to adjust the function to the desired setting.
• Select [Import Current Setting] to register the current settings of the
camera to the registration number that you chose.
4 Select [Register].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
178
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Items that can be registered
• You can register various functions for shooting. The items that can
actually be registered are displayed on the menu of the camera.
• Exposure
• Focus setting
• Drive mode (other than self-timer)
To recall registered settings
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ Custom Key]
Select the desired key and then select one of the
registration numbers from [Recall Custom hold 1] to
[Recall Custom hold 3].
On the shooting screen, press the shutter button while
holding down the key to which you assigned one of the
registration numbers.
The registered settings are activated while you are holding down the
custom key.
Hint
• You can change the settings for [Reg. Custom Shoot Set] after assigning one
of the registration numbers to the custom key using [ Custom Key].
Note
• The registration numbers [Recall Custom hold 1] through
[Recall Custom hold 3] are available only when the shooting mode is set to
P/A/S/M.
• Depending on the attached lens and the status of the camera when the
registered setting recall is executed, the registered settings may not take
effect.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
179
Customizing the camera
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Assigning frequently used functions to
buttons (Custom Key)
You can use the custom key function to assign the functions you use
most frequently to easily operable keys. This lets you skip the process of
selecting items from MENU, so you can recall the functions more quickly.
You can also assign [Not set] to easily operable keys to prevent accidental
operation.
You can separately assign functions to custom keys for the still image
shooting mode ( Custom Key), movie shooting mode ( Custom Key),
and playback mode ( Custom Key).
• Assignable functions vary depending on the keys.
You can assign functions to the following keys.
AF-ON Button
Custom Button 3
Custom Button 2
Custom Button 1
AEL Button
Center Button
Control Wheel / Left Button /
Right Button / Down Button
Custom Button 4
Multi-Slc Center Btn
Fn/ Button
Hint
• You can recall functions more quickly by using the Function menu
(page26) to configure each setting directly from the Fn button, along with
the custom keys.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
180
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
The following is the procedure for assigning the [Eye AF] function to the
AEL button.
1 MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ Custom Key].
• If you want to assign a function to recall while shooting movies,
select [ Custom Key]. If you want to assign a function to recall while
playing back images, select [ Custom Key].
2 Move to the [Rear1] screen using the left/right side of the
control wheel. Then, select [AEL Button] and press the center of
the control wheel.
3 Press the left/right side of the control wheel until [Eye AF] is
displayed. Select [Eye AF], and then press the center.
• If you press the AEL button in the still image shooting mode and eyes
are detected, [Eye AF] will activate, and the camera will focus on the
eyes. Shoot images while holding down the AEL button.
Note
• You can also assign shooting functions to the focus hold button on the lens.
However, some lenses do not have a focus hold button.
• If you assign [Follow Custom ( )] to a custom key using [ Custom Key],
but the function is one that is unavailable in the movie shooting mode such
as [ JPEG Quality] or [Flash Mode], the function will not be recalled when
you press the key in the movie shooting mode.
• If you assign [Follow Custom ( / )] to a custom key using
[Custom Key], the camera will switch to the shooting mode and recall the
assigned function when you press the key in the playback mode.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
181
Customizing the camera
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Customizing the functions of the dial
Changing the function of the dial temporarily
(My Dial Settings)
You can assign the desired functions to the front dial, rear dial, and control
wheel, and register up to three combinations of settings as “My Dial”
settings. You can quickly recall or switch registered “My Dial” settings by
pressing the custom key you assigned in advance.
Registering functions to “My Dial”
Register the functions that you want to assign to the front dial, the rear
dial, and the control wheel as [My Dial 1] through [My Dial 3].
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [My Dial Settings].
Select a dial or wheel for (My Dial 1), and press the
center of the control wheel.
Select the desired function to assign using the top/
bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel, and then
press the center of the control wheel.
• Select “--” (Not set) for a dial or wheel to which you do not want to
assign any function.
After you select functions for all of the dials and the wheel
in (My Dial 1) by repeating Steps and , select [OK].
The settings for (My Dial 1) will be registered.
• If you want to register (My Dial 2) and (My Dial 3) as well,
follow the same procedure as described above.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
182
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Assigning a key to recall “My Dial”
Assign a custom key to recall the registered “My Dial” settings.
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ Custom Key] or
[ Custom Key] Select the key that you want to use to
recall “My Dial.”
Select the number of the “My Dial” setting that you want to
recall or the pattern for switching “My Dial.”
My Dial 1 during Hold/ My Dial 2 during Hold
/My Dial 3 during Hold: While you hold down the key, the
functions that you registered in [My Dial Settings] are assigned to
the dial/wheel.
My Dial 123: Each time you press the key, the function changes
in the following sequence: “Normal function Function of My
Dial 1 Function of My Dial 2 Function of My Dial 3 Normal
function.”
Toggle My Dial 1/ Toggle My Dial 2/ Toggle My Dial 3: The function
registered using [My Dial Settings] is maintained even if you do
not hold down the key. Press the key again to return to the normal
function.
Shooting while switching “My Dial”
During shooting, you can recall “My Dial” using the custom key, and shoot
as you change the shooting setting by turning the front dial, the rear dial,
and the control wheel.
Note
• “My Dial” settings in which every dial/wheel is set to [Not set] are not recalled
when you press the custom key. They are also skipped in [My Dial 123].
• Even if a dial/wheel has been locked using the [Lock Operation Parts]
function, it will be unlocked temporarily when “My Dial” is recalled.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
183
Customizing the camera
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Customizing the MENU (My Menu)
Add Item
You can register the desired menu items to (My Menu) under MENU.
1 MENU (My Menu) [Add Item].
2 Select an item that you want to add to (My Menu) using the
top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.
3 Select a destination using the top/bottom/left/right sides of
the control wheel.
Hint
• You can add up to 30 items to (My Menu).
Note
• You cannot add the following items to (My Menu).
– Any item under MENU (Playback)
– [View on TV]
Sort Item
You can rearrange menu items added to (My Menu) under MENU.
1 MENU (My Menu) [Sort Item].
2 Select an item that you want to move using the top/bottom/
left/right sides of the control wheel.
3 Select a destination using the top/bottom/left/right sides of
the control wheel.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
184
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Delete Item
You can delete menu items added to (My Menu) of MENU.
1 MENU (My Menu) [Delete Item].
2 Select an item that you want to delete using the top/bottom/
left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the center
to delete the selected item.
Hint
• To delete all the items on a page, select MENU (My Menu)
[Delete Page].
• You can delete all the items added to (My Menu) by selecting MENU
(My Menu) [Delete All].
Display From My Menu
You can set My Menu to appear first when you press the MENU button.
MENU (My Menu) [Display From My Menu] desired
setting.
On: My Menu appears first when you press the MENU button.
Off: The most recently displayed menu appears when you press the MENU
button.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
185
Customizing the camera
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Checking images before/after recording
Auto Review
You can check the recorded image on the screen right after the shooting.
You can also set the display time for Auto Review.
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [Auto Review] desired
setting.
10 Sec/5 Sec/2 Sec: Displays the recorded image on the screen right after
shooting for the selected duration of time. If you perform a magnifying
operation during Auto Review, you can check that image using the
magnified scale.
Off: Does not display the Auto Review.
Note
• When you use a function that performs image processing, the image before
processing may be displayed temporarily, followed by the image after
processing.
• The DISP (Display Setting) settings are applied for the Auto Review display
(page31).
Aperture Preview
While you press and hold the key to which you assigned the
[Aperture Preview] function, the aperture is stepped down to the set
aperture value and you can check the blurriness prior to shooting.
1 MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ Custom Key] set
the [Aperture Preview] function to the desired key.
2 Confirm the image by pressing the key to which
[Aperture Preview] was assigned.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
186
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Hint
• Although you can change the aperture value during the preview, the subject
may be defocused if you select a brighter aperture. We recommend that you
adjust the focus again.
Shot. Result Preview
While pressing down the key to which [Shot. Result Preview] is assigned,
you can check the image preview with the DRO, shutter speed, aperture
and ISO sensitivity settings applied. Check the shooting result preview
before shooting.
1 MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ Custom Key] set
the [Shot. Result Preview] function to the desired key.
2 Confirm the image by pressing the key to which
[Shot. Result Preview] was assigned.
Hint
• The DRO settings, shutter speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity settings you
have set are reflected on the image for [Shot. Result Preview], but some
effects cannot be previewed depending on the shooting settings. Even in that
case, the settings you have selected will be applied to the images you shoot.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
187
Customizing the camera
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Monitor/viewfinder settings
FINDER/MONITOR
Sets the method for switching the display between the viewfinder and the
monitor.
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [FINDER/MONITOR]
desired setting.
Auto: When you look into the viewfinder, the eye sensor reacts and the
display is switched to the viewfinder automatically.
Viewfinder (Manual): The monitor is turned off and the image is
displayed only in the viewfinder.
Monitor (Manual): The viewfinder is turned off and the image is always
displayed on the monitor.
Hint
• You can assign the [FINDER/MONITOR] function to your preferred key. MENU
(Camera Settings 2) [ Custom Key], [ Custom Key] or
[Custom Key] set [Finder/Monitor Sel.] to the preferred key.
• If you want to retain the viewfinder display or the monitor display, set
[FINDER/MONITOR] to [Viewfinder (Manual)] or [Monitor (Manual)]
beforehand.
You can keep the monitor off when you take your eyes off the viewfinder
during recording by setting the monitor display to [Monitor Off] using the
DISP button. Select MENU (Camera Settings 2) [DISP Button]
[Monitor] and add a check mark to [Monitor Off] beforehand.
Note
• When the monitor is pulled out, the eye sensor of the camera will not detect
your eye approaching even if [FINDER/MONITOR] is set to [Auto]. The image
will continue to be displayed on the monitor.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
188
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Finder Frame Rate
Display the subject’s movements more smoothly by adjusting the
frame rate of the viewfinder during still image shooting. This function is
convenient when shooting a fast-moving subject.
MENU (Camera Settings 2) [ Finder Frame Rate]
desired setting.
• This function can be assigned to key of your choice using
[Custom Key].
Standard: Displays the subject at a normal frame rate on the viewfinder.
High: Displays the movements of the subject more smoothly on the
viewfinder.
Note
• When [ Finder Frame Rate] is set to [High], the resolution of the viewfinder
is lowered.
• Even when [ Finder Frame Rate] is set to [High], the setting may switch
to [Standard] automatically depending on the temperature of the shooting
environment and the shooting conditions.
• [ Finder Frame Rate] is locked to [Standard] in the following situations:
– During playback
– During HDMI connection
– When the temperature inside the camera’s body is high
– During continuous shooting with [ Shutter Type] set to [Auto] or
[Electronic Shutter].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
189
Customizing the camera
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Memory card settings
Format
When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we
recommend that you format the card using the camera for stable
performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently
erases all data on the memory card, and is unrecoverable. Save valuable
data on a computer, etc.
MENU (Setup) [Format] desired memory card slot.
Note
• Formatting permanently erases all data including protected images and
registered settings (from M1 to M4) (page176).
• The access lamp lights up during formatting. Do not remove the memory card
while the access lamp is lit up.
• Format the memory card on this camera. If you format the memory card on
the computer, the memory card may not be usable depending on the format
type.
• It may take a few minutes to complete formatting, depending on the memory
card.
• You cannot format the memory card if the remaining battery charge is less
than 1%.
File/Folder Settings
Sets file names for still images to be shot, and specifies folders for storing
the shot still images.
MENU (Setup) [ File/Folder Settings] desired
setting.
File Number: You can set how to assign file numbers to still images.
[Series]: Does not reset file numbers for each folder.
[Reset]: Resets file numbers for each folder.
Set File Name: You can specify the first three characters of the file name.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
190
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Folder Name: You can set how folder names are assigned.
[Standard Form]: Folders are named as “folder number + MSDCF.”
Example: 100MSDCF
[Date Form]: Folders are named as “folder number + Y (the last digit of
the year)/MM/DD.”
Example: 10090405 (Folder number: 100; date: 04/05/2019)
Hint
• The settings for [File Number] and [Set File Name] are applied to both Slot1
and Slot2.
• When [File Number] is set to [Series], file numbers will be assigned
sequentially across the memory cards in the slots even if you change the
[Prioritize Rec. Media] setting.
Note
• Only capital letters, numbers, and underscores can be used for
[Set File Name]. Underscores cannot be used for the first character.
• The three characters specified using [Set File Name] are only applied to files
recorded after the setting is made.
• When [Folder Name] is set to [Date Form], you cannot select the folder where
files are stored.
• If [Recording Mode] under [Rec. Media Settings] is set to a parameter other
than [Standard], only folders shared by both memory cards may be selectable.
If you cannot find a shared folder, you can create one using [New Folder].
• If [Recording Mode] under [Rec. Media Settings] is set to a parameter other
than [Standard], a folder numbered with the previous folder number on the
memory card +1 will be created on both memory cards.
• When you shoot images with [Recording Mode] under [Rec. Media Settings]
set to a parameter other than [Standard], a new folder may be automatically
created.
• A new folder may be automatically created if you shoot images using a
memory card that has been used in another device.
• Up to 4,000 images in total can be stored in one folder. When the folder
capacity is exceeded, a new folder may be automatically created.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
191
Customizing the camera
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
File Settings
Configure settings for the file names of recorded movies.
MENU (Setup) [ File Settings] desired setting.
File Number: You can set how to assign file numbers to movies.
[Series]: Does not reset file numbers even if the memory card is
changed.
[Reset]: Resets the file number when the memory card is changed.
Series Counter Reset: Resets the series counter used when [File Number]
is set to [Series].
File Name Format: You can set the format for movie file names.
[Standard]: The file name of the recorded movie starts with “C.”
Example: C0001
[Title]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Title+File
number.”
[Date+Title]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes
“Date+Title+File number.”
[Title+Date]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes
“Title+Date+File number.”
Title Name Settings: You can set the title when [File Name Format] is set
to [Title], [Date+Title], or [Title+Date].
Hint
• The settings for [File Number] and [File Name Format] are applied to both
Slot1 and Slot2.
• When [File Number] is set to [Series], file numbers will be assigned
sequentially across the memory cards in the slots even if you change the
[Prioritize Rec. Media] setting.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
192
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Note
• Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be input for
[Title Name Settings]. Up to 37characters can be entered.
• Titles specified using [Title Name Settings] are only applied to movies
recorded after the setting is made.
• [ File Settings] does not apply to AVCHD movies.
• You cannot set how folder names are assigned for movies.
• If you are using an SDHC memory card, [File Name Format] is locked to
[Standard].
• If there are unused numbers due to file deletion, etc., these numbers will be
reused when the movie file number reaches “9999.”
Rec. Media Settings
Prioritize Rec. Media
Selects the memory card slot on which to record.
[Slot 1] is the default setting. If you do not intend to change the settings
and will only use one memory card, use the slot 1.
MENU (Setup) [Rec. Media Settings]
[Prioritize Rec. Media] desired slot.
Slot 1: Selects media in the slot 1.
Slot 2: Selects media in the slot 2.
Hint
• To record the same image on two memory cards at the same time or to sort
recorded images onto two memory card slots by the image type (still image/
movie), use [Recording Mode].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
193
Customizing the camera
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Recording Mode
You can select the method for recording an image, such as recording the
same image simultaneously to two memory cards or recording different
types of images to two memory cards.
MENU (Setup) [Rec. Media Settings]
[Recording Mode] desired setting.
Standard: Records an image to a memory card in the memory card slot
that you select in [Prioritize Rec. Media].
Simult. ( ): Records a still image to both memory cards and records
a movie to a memory card in the memory card slot that you select in
[Prioritize Rec. Media].
Simult. ( ): Records a still image to a memory card in the memory card
slot that you select in [Prioritize Rec. Media], and records a movie to
both memory cards.
Simult. ( /): Records a still image and a movie to both memory cards.
Sort (RAW/JPEG): Records an image in RAW format to a memory card
in the memory card slot that you select in [Prioritize Rec. Media], and
records an image in JPEG format to the other memory card. Movies are
recorded to the memory card in the memory card slot that you selected
in [Prioritize Rec. Media].
Sort (JPEG/RAW): Records an image in JPEG format to a memory card
in the memory card slot that you select in [Prioritize Rec. Media], and
records an image in RAW format to the other memory card. Movies are
recorded to the memory card in the memory card slot that you selected
in [Prioritize Rec. Media].
Sort ( /): Records a still image to a memory card in the memory card
slot that you select in [Prioritize Rec. Media], and records a movie to the
other memory card.
Hint
• Even when [Recording Mode] is set to [Sort (RAW/JPEG)] or [Sort (JPEG/RAW)],
if [RAW & JPEG] is not selected under [ File Format], only files of the
selected format will be recorded.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
194
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Auto Switch Media
If a memory card in use becomes full or you have forgotten to insert a
memory card into a slot, you can record images to the other memory card.
For details on how the memory card slot to which images are recorded
changes, refer to the “Help Guide” (page2).
MENU (Setup) [Rec. Media Settings]
[Auto Switch Media] desired setting.
On: The camera automatically starts recording on the other memory card
when a memory card in use becomes full or if you have forgotten to
insert a memory card.
Off: The camera does not perform [Auto Switch Media].
Hint
• Images are recorded to the memory card in the slot displayed on the
monitor with an arrow symbol. After the camera switches the slot using
[Auto Switch Media], replace the memory card in the former slot with a
recordable memory card.
• If [Recording Mode] is set to [Standard], the setting for [Prioritize Rec. Media]
will switch automatically when the slot switches. If you want to record
on the slot in use before switching, select the desired slot again using
[Prioritize Rec. Media].
• If you want to continually record with the settings selected with
[Recording Mode] and [Prioritize Rec. Media], set [Auto Switch Media] to [Off].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
195
Customizing the camera
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Camera settings
Power Save Start Time
Sets time intervals to automatically switch to power save mode when you
are not performing operations to prevent wearing down the battery pack.
To return to shooting mode, perform an operation such as pressing the
shutter button halfway down.
MENU (Setup) [Power Save Start Time] desired
setting.
30 Min/5 Min/2 Min/1 Min/10 Sec
Note
• Turn off the product when you do not use it for a long time.
• The power save function is deactivated in the following situations:
– While power is being supplied via USB
– While playing back slideshows
– During FTP transfer
– While recording movies
– While connected to a computer or TV
– When [IR Remote Ctrl] is set to [On]
– When [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On]
IR Remote Ctrl
You can operate this product and shoot images using the SHUTTER
button, 2SEC button (2 second delay shutter), and START/STOP button
(or Movie button (RMT-DSLR2 only)) on the Wireless Remote Commander
RMT-DSLR1 (sold separately) and RMT-DSLR2 (sold separately). Refer also
to the operating instructions for the Infrared Remote Commander.
MENU (Setup) [IR Remote Ctrl] desired setting.
On: Allows infrared remote commander operation.
Off: Does not allow infrared remote commander operation.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
196
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Note
• The lens or lens hood may block the infrared remote sensor that receive the
signals. Use the infrared remote commander in the position from which the
signal can reach the product.
• When [IR Remote Ctrl] is set to [On], the product does not switch to power
save mode. Set [Off] after using an infrared remote commander.
• An infrared remote commander cannot be used while [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is
set to [On].
HDMI Settings
HDMI Resolution
When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI
terminals using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can select HDMI
Resolution to output images to the TV.
MENU (Setup) [HDMI Settings] [HDMI Resolution]
desired setting.
Auto: The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output
resolution.
2160p/1080p: Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.
1080p: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
1080i: Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).
Note
• If the images are not displayed properly using the [Auto] setting, select either
[1080i], [1080p] or [2160p/1080p], based on which TV is to be connected.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
197
Customizing the camera
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
24p/60p Output (Only for 1080 60i compatible models)
You can set 1080/24p or 1080/60p as the HDMI output format when
[Record Setting] is set to [24p 50M], [24p 60M] or [24p 100M].
MENU (Setup) [HDMI Settings]
[HDMI Resolution] [1080p] or [2160p/1080p].
MENU (Setup) [HDMI Settings]
[ 24p/60p Output] desired setting.
60p: Movies are output as 60p.
24p: Movies are output as 24p.
Note
• Steps and can be set in either order.
HDMI Info. Display
Selects whether to display the shooting information when this product
and the TV are connected using an HDMI cable (sold separately).
MENU (Setup) [HDMI Settings]
[HDMI Info. Display] desired setting.
On: Displays the shooting information on the TV.
The recorded image and the shooting information are displayed on the
TV, while nothing is displayed on the camera’s monitor.
Off: Does not display the shooting information on the TV.
Only the recorded image is displayed on the TV, while the recorded
image and the shooting information are displayed on the camera’s
monitor.
Note
• When the camera is connected to an HDMI device while [ File Format] is set
to [XAVC S 4K], the setting switches to [Off].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
198
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
TC Output
Sets whether or not to layer the TC (time code) information on the
output signal via the HDMI terminal when outputting the signal to other
professional-use devices.
This function layers the time code information on the HDMI output signal.
The product sends the time code information as digital data, not as an
image displayed on the screen. The connected device can then refer to
the digital data to recognize the time data.
MENU (Setup) [HDMI Settings] [ TC Output]
desired setting.
On: Time code is output to other devices.
Off: Time code is not output to other devices.
Note
• When [ TC Output] is set to [On], the image may not be output properly to
the TV or recording device. In such cases, set [ TC Output] to [Off].
REC Control
If you connect the camera to an external recorder/player, you can
remotely command the recorder/player to start/stop recording using the
camera.
MENU (Setup) [HDMI Settings] [ REC Control]
desired setting.
On: The camera can send a recording command to an external
recorder/player.
The camera is sending a recording command to an external
recorder/player.
Off: The camera is not able to send a command to an external recorder/
player to start/stop recording.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
199
Customizing the camera
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Note
• Available for external recorders/players compatible with [ REC Control].
• When you use the [ REC Control] function, set the shooting mode to
(Movie).
• When [ TC Output] is set to [Off], you cannot use the [ REC Control]
function.
• Even when is displayed, the external recorder/player may not work
properly depending on the settings or status of the recorder/player. Check if
the external recorder/player works properly before use.
CTRL FOR HDMI
When connecting this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV using an
HDMI cable (sold separately), you can operate this product by aiming the
TV remote control at the TV.
MENU (Setup) [HDMI Settings]
[CTRL FOR HDMI] desired setting.
On: You can operate this product with a TV’s remote control.
Off: You cannot operate this product with a TV’s remote control.
Connect this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV.
The input of the TV is switched automatically and images on this
product are displayed on the TV screen.
Press the SYNC MENU button of the TV’s remote control.
Operate this product using the TV’s remote control.
Note
• If you connect this product to a TV using an HDMI cable, available menu items
are limited.
• [CTRL FOR HDMI] is available only with a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV. Also,
the SYNC MENU operation differs depending on the TV you are using. For
details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the TV.
• If the product performs unwanted operations in response to the TV remote
control when the product is connected to another manufacturer’s TV using
an HDMI connection, select MENU (Setup) [HDMI Settings]
[CTRL FOR HDMI] [Off].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
200
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
USB Power Supply
Sets whether to supply power via the USB cable when the product is
connected to a computer or an USB device.
MENU (Setup) [USB Power Supply] desired setting.
On: Power is supplied to the product via a USB cable when the product is
connected to a computer, etc.
Off: Power is not supplied to the product via a USB cable when the
product is connected to a computer, etc.
Operations available while supplying power via a USB
cable
The following table shows you which operations are available/unavailable
while supplying power via a USB cable.
A checkmark indicates that the operation is available, and “―” indicates
that the operation is unavailable.
Operation Available/Unavailable
Shooting images
Playing back images
Wi-Fi/NFC/Bluetooth connections
Charging a battery pack ―
Turning the camera on without a battery pack
inserted ―
Note
• Insert the battery pack into the product to supply power via USB cable.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
201
Customizing the camera
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Save/Load Settings
You can save/load camera settings to/from a memory card. You can also
load settings from another camera of the same model.
MENU (Setup) [Save/Load Settings] desired item.
Save: Saves the current settings of this camera to a memory card.
Load: Loads the settings from a memory card to this camera.
Delete: Deletes the settings saved on a memory card.
Hint
• For details on which settings can be saved, refer to the “Help Guide.”
Note
• You can save up to 10settings per memory card. When 10settings have been
already saved, you cannot perform [Save New]. Delete the existing settings
using [Delete], or overwrite them.
• Only Slot1 is used for saving or loading data. You cannot change the saving/
loading destination slot.
• You cannot load settings from a camera of a different model.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
202
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\060SET.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Initializing the camera
Setting Reset
Resets the product to the default settings. Even if you perform
[Setting Reset], the recorded images are retained.
MENU (Setup) [Setting Reset] desired setting.
Camera Settings Reset: Initializes the main shooting settings to the
default settings.
Initialize: Initializes all the settings to the default settings.
Note
• Be sure not to eject the battery pack while resetting.
• The value set with [AF Micro Adj.] will not be reset even when
[Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] is performed.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
Using network functions
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\070WRL.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
GB
203
Using network functions
Using network functions
Using the Wi-Fi/One-touch (NFC)/
Bluetooth/wired LAN functions
You can perform the following operations using the camera’s Wi-Fi, NFC
One-touch, Bluetooth, and wired LAN functions.
• Saving images to a computer
• Transferring images from the camera to a smartphone
• Using a smartphone as a remote control for the camera
• Viewing still images on a TV
• Recording location information from a smartphone to images
• Transferring images to the FTP server
For details, refer to the “Help Guide” (page 2).
Installing Imaging Edge Mobile
Imaging Edge Mobile is required to connect the camera and a
smartphone. If Imaging Edge Mobile is already installed on your
smartphone, be sure to update it to the latest version.
For details on Imaging Edge Mobile, refer to the support page
(https://www.sony.net/iem/).
Note
• To use the camera’s NFC One-touch function, an NFC-enabled smartphone or
tablet is required.
• The Wi-Fi functions introduced in this manual are not guaranteed to operate
on all smartphones or tablets.
• Depending on future version upgrades, the operational procedures or screen
displays are subject to change without notice.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
204
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\070WRL.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Recording location information to captured images
By using Imaging Edge Mobile, you can obtain location information from
a connected smartphone (via Bluetooth communication) and record it to
captured images.
For details on the operating procedure, refer to the “Help Guide”
(page2) or the following support page.
https://www.sony.net/iem/btg/
Transferring images to the FTP server
You can use the camera’s Wi-Fi function or wired LAN to transfer images
to the FTP server.
For details, refer to the “FTP Help Guide.”
https://rd1.sony.net/help/di/ftp/h_zz/
• Basic knowledge of FTP servers is required.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
205
Using network functions
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\070WRL.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Connecting the camera and a smartphone
Using a smartphone as a remote control for the camera
With Imaging Edge Mobile, you can shoot images while checking the
shooting range of the camera on the monitor of a smartphone.
1 MENU (Network) [Ctrl w/ Smartphone]
[Ctrl w/ Smartphone], then select [On].
2 Set up the camera and smartphone by following the procedure
below.
To establish a one-touch connection with an NFC-enabled
smartphone
Activate the NFC function of the smartphone.
• On an iPhone/iPad, launch Imaging Edge Mobile, and then select
[Scan NFC/QR Code of the Camera] [Scan NFC of the Camera] to
activate the NFC function.
Switch the camera to the shooting mode.
Touch the (N-Mark) on the camera to the smartphone
for 1-2 seconds.
• If you are using an Android smartphone, touch the (N-Mark) on
the camera to the (N-Mark) on the smartphone.
Note
• If you cannot connect the camera to the smartphone using the NFC
function, follow the procedure under “To establish a Wi-Fi connection with a
smartphone using a QR code.”
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
206
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\070WRL.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
To establish a Wi-Fi connection with a smartphone using
a QR code
Select MENU (Network)
[Ctrl w/ Smartphone]
[ Connection], to display the
QR code on the monitor of the
camera.
Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on the smartphone, and
select [Scan QR Code of the Camera].
Scan the QR code.
Hint
• Once the QR code has been read, this product’s SSID (DIRECT-xxxx) and
password are registered to the smartphone. This enables you to easily
connect the smartphone to the product via Wi-Fi at a later date by selecting
the SSID.
Note
• If you cannot connect this product to a smartphone using the NFC function
or QR code, use the SSID and password. For detailed instructions, refer to the
“Help Guide.”
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
207
Using network functions
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\070WRL.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Transferring images from the camera to a smartphone
You can transfer still images and XAVC S movies to a smartphone.
However, images that are not saved on the camera’s memory card cannot
be transferred.
1 On the camera, play back an image that you want to transfer to
the smartphone.
2 Connect the camera to the smartphone.
Images shot with the camera are transferred to the smartphone.
• To establish a one-touch connection with an NFC-enabled
smartphone, touch the smartphone to the (N-Mark) on the camera
(page205). If you are using an Android smartphone, touch the
(N-Mark) on the camera to the (N-Mark) on the smartphone.
• To establish a Wi-Fi connection with the smartphone using a QR code,
select MENU (Network) [Send to Smartphone Func.]
[Send to Smartphone] and display the QR code on the monitor of the
camera, then scan the QR code using Imaging Edge Mobile on the
smartphone.
• The transferred images are saved to a gallery or album on the
Android, or to an album on the iPhone or iPad.
Hint
• You can select images and transfer them to the smartphone while the camera
is turned off by setting MENU (Network) [Send to Smartphone Func.]
[Cnct. during Power OFF] to [On].
Note
• If you scan the QR code displayed under MENU (Network)
[Ctrl w/ Smartphone] [ Connection], the function for using the
smartphone as a remote control for the camera will be activated (page 206).
To transfer images, select [Send to Smartphone] and display the QR code.
• For details on which file formats of still images and movies are transferable,
refer to the “Help Guide” (page2).
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
208
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\070WRL.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Connecting the camera to a wireless
access point
Connect the camera to your wireless access point. Before starting the
procedure, make sure you have the SSID (name of the access point) and
password of your wireless access point with you.
1 MENU (Network) [Wi-Fi Settings]
[Access Point Set.].
2 Use the control wheel to select the access point to which you
want to connect. Press the center of the control wheel and enter
the password for the wireless access point, then select [OK].
Note
• If a connection is not established, see the wireless access point operating
instructions or contact the administrator of the access point.
To save images to a computer, install PlayMemories Home on your computer.
PlayMemories Home
https://www.sony.net/pm/
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
209
Using network functions
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\070WRL.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Using a remote commander with
Bluetooth communication
You can operate the camera using a Bluetooth remote commander
RMT-P1BT (sold separately). Select MENU (Network)
[Bluetooth Settings] [Bluetooth Function] [On] in advance. Refer to
the instruction manual for the Bluetooth remote commander as well.
1 On the camera, select MENU (Network)
[Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] [On].
• If there is no Bluetooth device currently paired with the camera, the
screen for pairing as described in Step 2 will appear.
On: Enables Bluetooth remote commander operation.
Off: Disables Bluetooth remote commander operation.
2 On the camera, select MENU (Network)
[Bluetooth Settings] [Pairing] to display the screen for
pairing.
3 On the Bluetooth remote commander, perform pairing.
• For details, refer to the instruction manual for the Bluetooth remote
commander.
4 On the camera, select [OK] on the confirmation screen for the
Bluetooth connection.
• Pairing is complete, and you can now operate the camera from the
Bluetooth remote commander. After pairing the device once, you can
connect the camera and the Bluetooth remote commander again in
the future by setting [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] to [On].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
210
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\070WRL.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Hint
• The Bluetooth connection is only active while you are operating the camera
using the Bluetooth remote commander.
• If the function does not work properly, check the following notes and then try
pairing again.
– Confirm that the camera is not connected with other devices using the
Bluetooth function.
– Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off] (page226).
– Execute [Reset Network Set.] of the camera.
Note
• When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. To use
the Bluetooth remote commander, perform pairing again.
• If the Bluetooth connection is unstable, remove any obstacles, such as people
or metal objects from between the camera and the paired Bluetooth remote
commander.
• You cannot use the function for linking location information with a
smartphone while [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On].
• You cannot use an infrared remote commander while [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is
set to [On].
• While [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On], the camera will not switch to the
power-saving mode. Change the setting to [Off] when you are done using the
Bluetooth remote commander.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\090COM.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
GB
211
Using a computer
Using a computer
Connecting the camera to a computer
Selecting the appropriate USB connection method
Selects the USB connection method when this product is connected to a
computer, etc. Select MENU (Network) [Ctrl w/ Smartphone]
[Ctrl w/ Smartphone] [Off] beforehand.
Also, when you set MENU (Network) [PC Remote Function]
[PC Remote Cnct Method] to [USB], set [PC Remote] under
[PC Remote Function] to [Off].
MENU (Setup) [USB Connection] desired setting.
Auto: Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically,
depending on the computer or other USB devices to be connected.
Windows 7, Windows 8.1, or Windows 10 computers are connected in
MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
Mass Storage: Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this
product, a computer, and other USB devices.
MTP: Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer,
and other USB devices. Windows 7, Windows 8.1, or Windows 10
computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are
enabled for use.
• The memory card in memory card slot 1 is the connection target.
Note
• It may take some time to make the connection between this product and a
computer when [USB Connection] is set to [Auto].
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
212
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\090COM.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Operating the camera from a computer
(PC Remote Function)
Uses a Wi-Fi or USB connection, etc. to control the camera from a
computer, including such functions as shooting and storing images on the
computer.
The Imaging Edge (Remote) software is required for this function. For
details on how to operate the camera from a computer, refer to the
“Help Guide.”
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
213
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\090COM.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Using a computer
Introduction to computer software
We offer the following computer software to enhance your enjoyment
of photos/movies. Access one of the following URLs using your Internet
browser and then download the software by following the onscreen
instructions.
If one of these software is already installed on your computer, update it to
the latest version before use.
For details on the software for computers, refer to the following URL:
https://www.sony.net/disoft/
You can check the recommended operating environment for the software from
the following URL:
https://www.sony.net/pcenv/
Imaging Edge
Imaging Edge is a software suite that includes functions such as remote
shooting from a computer, and adjusting or developing RAW images
recorded with the camera.
For details on Imaging Edge, refer to the following URL:
https://www.sony.net/iex/
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
214
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\090COM.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
PlayMemories Home
PlayMemories Home allows you to import still images and movies to your
computer and view or use them.
You need to install PlayMemories Home to import XAVC S movies or
AVCHD movies to your computer.
You can access the download website directly from the following URL:
https://www.sony.net/pm/
• When you connect the camera to your computer, new functions may
be added to PlayMemories Home. Connecting the camera to your
computer is therefore recommended even if PlayMemories Home has
already been installed on the computer.
Remote Camera Tool
Remote Camera Tool is software for PC remote shooting using a wired
LAN. You can change the camera settings and shoot images from a
computer by connecting the camera to a computer or switching hub using
a LAN cable.
For details on Remote Camera Tool, refer to the following URL:
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/app/remotecameratool/l/index.php
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
MENU items/List of icons
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\100MEN.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
MENU items/List of icons
GB
215
MENU items/List of icons
Using MENU items
You can change settings related to all the camera operations including
shooting, playback, and operating method. You can also execute camera
functions from the MENU.
1 Press the MENU button to
display the menu screen.
MENU button
2 Select the desired setting you
want to adjust using the top/
bottom/left/right sides of the
control wheel or by turning
the control wheel, and then
press the center of the control
wheel.
MENU tab
• Select a MENU tab at the top of the screen, and press the left/right
side of the control wheel to move to another MENU tab.
• You can move to another MENU tab by turning the front dial.
• You can move to the next MENU tab by pressing the Fn button.
• You can go back to the previous screen by pressing the MENU button.
3 Select the desired setting value, and press the center to confirm
your selection.
Hint
• You can display the menu screen by assigning the [MENU] function to a
custom key using [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key], and then pressing
that key.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
216
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\100MEN.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
List of MENU items
For details on each MENU items, refer to the reference page in the last
column or the Help Guide.
(Camera Settings 1)
Quality/Image Size
File Format Sets the file format for still images.
([RAW]/ [JPEG], etc.)
97
RAW File Type Selects the file type for RAW images. 98
JPEG Quality Selects the JPEG image quality
for [RAW & JPEG] or [JPEG] under
[ File Format].
98
JPEG Image Size Selects the size of still images.
(L/ M/ S)
99
Aspect Ratio Selects the aspect ratio for still
images.
100
APS-C/Super 35mm Sets whether to record in
APS-C-equivalent size for still images
and Super 35 mm-equivalent size for
movies.
100
Long Exposure NR Sets noise reduction processing for
shots with a shutter speed of 1 second
or longer.
136
High ISO NR Sets noise reduction processing for
high-sensitivity shooting.
137
Color Space Changes the color space (range of
reproducible colors).
133
Lens Comp. Selects the type of lens
compensation.
Help
Guide
Red tab
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
217
MENU items/List of icons
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\100MEN.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Shoot Mode/Drive
Self-timer Type When shooting with the self-timer,
sets how many seconds elapse from
when you press the shutter button
until when the image is recorded and
how many images are recorded.
Help
Guide
Bracket Settings Sets self-timer shooting in the bracket
mode, bracket type, and the shooting
order for exposure bracketing or white
balance bracketing.
89
Interval Shoot Func. Configures settings for interval
shooting.
90
/ Recall Calls up settings pre-registered to
[ / Memory].
108
/ Memory Registers the desired modes and
camera settings.
176
Select Media Selects the memory card slot from
which settings are recalled or to which
settings are registered for M1 through
M4.
Help
Guide
Reg. Custom Shoot Set Assign functions to the custom key to
recall when shooting.
177
AF
Priority Set in AF-S Sets the timing of the shutter
release when [Focus Mode] is set to
[Single-shot AF] or [DMF] with a still
subject.
Help
Guide
Priority Set in AF-C
Sets the timing of the shutter
release when [Focus Mode] is set to
[Continuous AF] with a moving subject.
Help
Guide
Focus Area Selects the area of focus.
([Wide]/ [Flexible Spot], etc.)
49
Focus Settings Configures settings for focusing using
the front dial, rear dial or control
wheel.
Help
Guide
Focus Area Limit Limits the types of available focus
area settings in advance.
52
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
218
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\100MEN.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Switch V/H AF Area Sets whether to adjust the
[Focus Area] and the position of the
focusing frame based on the camera’s
position (horizontal or vertical).
54
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator, which
provides light to aid focusing in dark
scenes.
63
Face/Eye AF Set. Configures settings such as whether
the camera focuses with priority on
human faces or eyes.
56
AF Tracking Sens. Sets the AF tracking sensitivity for the
still image mode.
Help
Guide
Aperture Drive in AF Changes the aperture drive system to
prioritize the auto-focusing tracking
performance or to prioritize silence.
66
AF w/ shutter Sets whether to perform auto
focusing when the shutter button is
pressed halfway down. This is useful
when you want to adjust the focus
and exposure separately.
Help
Guide
Pre-AF Sets whether or not to perform auto
focus before the shutter button is half
pressed.
Help
Guide
Eye-Start AF Sets whether to use auto focus when
you look through the viewfinder if
an LA-EA2/LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor
(sold separately) is attached.
Help
Guide
AF Area Registration Sets whether to move the focusing
frame to a preassigned position when
shooting still images.
61
Del. Regist. AF Area Deletes the focusing frame position
information that was registered using
[AF Area Registration].
Help
Guide
Focus Frame Color Sets the color of the frame indicating
the focusing area.
63
AF Area Auto Clear Sets whether the focus area is
displayed all the time or disappears
automatically shortly after focusing.
Help
Guide
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
219
MENU items/List of icons
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\100MEN.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Disp. cont. AF area Sets whether or not to display the
focus area in [Continuous AF] mode.
Help
Guide
Phase Detect. Area Sets phase detection AF area. Help
Guide
Circ. of Focus Point Sets whether to allow the focusing
frame to jump from one end to the
other when you move the focusing
frame.
64
AF Micro Adj. Finely adjusts the autofocused
position, when using the LA-EA2
or LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor
(sold separately).
64
Exposure
Exposure Comp. Compensates for the brightness of
the entire image.
111
Reset EV Comp. Sets whether to maintain
the exposure value set using
[Exposure Comp.] when you turn
off the power when the exposure
compensation dial position is set to
“0.”
Help
Guide
ISO Setting Sets functions related to ISO
sensitivity.
([ISO] / [ISO AUTO Min. SS], etc.)
120
Metering Mode Selects the method for measuring
brightness.
([Multi]/ [Spot], etc.)
113
Face Priority in Multi Metering Sets whether the camera measures
brightness based on detected faces
when [Metering Mode] is set to
[Multi].
114
Spot Metering Point Sets whether to coordinate the
spot metering point with the focus
area when [Focus Area] is set to
[Flexible Spot], etc.
115
Exposure step Selects the size of the increment
step for shutter speed, aperture, and
exposure compensation values.
Help
Guide
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
220
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\100MEN.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
AEL w/ shutter Sets whether to lock the exposure
when the shutter button is pressed
halfway down. This is useful when you
want to adjust the focus and exposure
separately.
Help
Guide
Exposure Std. Adjust Adjusts the standard for the correct
exposure value for each metering
modes.
Help
Guide
Flash
Flash Mode Sets the flash settings. 139
Flash Comp. Adjusts the intensity of flash output. 140
Exp.comp.set Sets whether to reflect exposure
compensation value to flash
compensation.
Help
Guide
Wireless Flash Sets whether to shoot with the
wireless flash.
142
Red Eye Reduction Reduces the red-eye phenomenon
when using flash.
Help
Guide
Color/WB/Img. Processing
White Balance Corrects the tone effect of the
ambient light to shoot whitish objects
in a white tone.
([Auto]/ [Daylight], etc.)
126
Priority Set in AWB Selects which tone to prioritize when
shooting under lighting conditions
such as incandescent light with
[White Balance] set to [Auto].
Help
Guide
DRO/Auto HDR Analyzes the contrast of light and
shadow between the subject and the
background by dividing the image
into small areas, and creates an image
with the optimal brightness and
gradation.
117
Creative Style Selects the desired image processing.
You can also adjust contrast,
saturation, and sharpness.
([Vivid]/ [Portrait], etc.)
130
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
221
MENU items/List of icons
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\100MEN.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Picture Effect Shoots images with a texture unique
to the selected effect.
([Toy Camera]/ [High Contrast Mono.],
etc.)
Help
Guide
Shutter AWB Lock Sets whether to lock the white
balance while the shutter button is
pressed in the auto white balance
mode.
128
Focus Assist
Focus Magnifier Enlarges the image before shooting
so that you can check the focus.
69
Focus Magnif. Time Sets the length of time the image will
be shown in an enlarged form.
Help
Guide
Initial Focus Mag. Sets the initial magnification scale
when using [Focus Magnifier].
Help
Guide
AF in Focus Mag. Sets whether or not to autofocus
when an enlarged image is being
displayed. While the enlarged image
is being displayed, you can focus
within a smaller area than the flexible
spot.
Help
Guide
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when
focusing manually.
70
Peaking Setting Sets the peaking function, which
enhances the outline of in-focus areas
when focusing manually.
Help
Guide
Shooting Assist
Anti-flicker Shoot. Detects flickering/blinking from
artificial light sources such as
fluorescent lighting and times the
shooting of images to moments when
flickering will have less of an impact.
76
Face Registration Registers or changes the person to be
given priority when focusing.
Help
Guide
Regist. Faces Priority Detects the registered face
with higher priority using
[Face Registration].
Help
Guide
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
222
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\100MEN.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
(Camera Settings 2)
Movie
Exposure Mode Sets the exposure mode when
shooting movies.
109
Exposure Mode Sets the exposure mode when
shooting slow-motion/quick-motion
movies.
110
File Format Selects the movie file format.
([XAVC S 4K]/ [AVCHD], etc.)
149
Record Setting Selects a frame-rate and bit-rate for
the movie.
150
S&Q Settings Changes the settings for slow-motion
and quick-motion movie shooting.
152
Proxy Recording Records low-bit-rate proxy files
simultaneously when recording
XAVC S movies.
158
AF drive speed Switches focusing speed when using
autofocus in movie mode.
Help
Guide
AF Tracking Sens. Sets the AF tracking sensitivity for the
movie mode.
Help
Guide
Auto Slow Shutter Sets the function that automatically
adjusts the shutter speed following
the brightness of the environment in
movie mode.
Help
Guide
Initial Focus Mag. Sets the initial magnification scale
when using [Focus Magnifier] in
movie mode.
Help
Guide
Audio Recording Sets whether to record audio when
shooting a movie.
154
Audio Rec Level Adjusts the audio recording level
during movie recording.
155
Audio Level Display Sets whether to display the audio
level.
Help
Guide
Audio Out Timing Sets the timing of audio output during
the movie recording.
Help
Guide
Purple tab
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
223
MENU items/List of icons
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\100MEN.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Wind Noise Reduct. Reduces wind noise during movie
recording.
Help
Guide
Marker Display Sets whether to display markers on
the monitor when recording movies.
156
Marker Settings Sets which markers to display on the
monitor when recording movies.
156
Video Light Mode Sets the illumination setting for the
HVL-LBPC LED light (sold separately).
Help
Guide
Movie w/ shutter Records movies using the shutter
button.
147
Shutter/SteadyShot
Shutter Type Sets whether to shoot with a
mechanical shutter or an electronic
shutter.
71
e-Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether to use the electronic
front curtain shutter function.
78
Release w/o Lens Sets whether to release the shutter
when the lens is not attached.
Help
Guide
Release w/o Card Sets whether to release the shutter
when a memory card is not inserted.
Help
Guide
SteadyShot Sets whether to activate SteadyShot
for shooting.
134
SteadyShot Settings Sets SteadyShot settings. 134
Zoom
Zoom Sets the zoom scale for zoom
functions other than the optical zoom.
124
Zoom Setting Sets whether to use the Clear Image
Zoom and Digital Zoom when
zooming.
124
Zoom Ring Rotate Assigns the zoom in/out to the
rotational direction of the zoom lens.
This function is only available with a
power zoom lens that is compatible
with this function.
Help
Guide
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
224
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\100MEN.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Display/Auto Review
DISP Button Sets the type of information to be
displayed on the monitor or in the
viewfinder when the DISP button is
pressed.
33
FINDER/MONITOR Sets the method for switching the
display between the viewfinder and
the monitor.
187
Finder Frame Rate Sets the frame rate for the viewfinder
when shooting still images.
188
Zebra Setting Sets the stripes displayed to adjust
brightness.
Help
Guide
Grid Line Displays grid lines for adjusting the
image composition.
Help
Guide
Exposure Set. Guide Sets the guide displayed when
exposure settings are changed in the
shooting screen.
Help
Guide
Live View Display Sets whether to reflect settings such
as exposure compensation in screen
display.
Help
Guide
Shoot. Start Disp. Sets whether or not to signal the
shutter release timing with a black
screen when the first image is shot
during blackout-free shooting.
76
Shoot. Timing Disp. Sets whether or not to display
indicators (such as a frame) on the
screen to show if the camera is
shooting.
75
Cont. Shoot. Length Sets whether to display an indicator
of the remaining time for which
continuous shooting can be
performed at the same shooting
speed.
81
Auto Review Sets auto review to display the
captured image after shooting.
185
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
225
MENU items/List of icons
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\100MEN.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Custom Operation
Custom Key Assigns functions to the various keys
so that you can perform operations
more quickly by pressing the keys
when shooting still images.
179
Custom Key Assigns functions to the various keys
so that you can perform operations
more quickly by pressing the keys
when shooting movies.
179
Custom Key Assigns functions to the keys so that
you can perform operations more
quickly by pressing the keys when
playing back images.
179
Function Menu Set. Customizes the functions displayed
when the Fn (Function) button is
pressed.
28
My Dial Settings Assigns the desired functions to
the dials and the control wheel, and
register up to three combinations of
settings.
181
Dial Setup Sets the functions of the front and
rear dials when the exposure mode
is set to M. Dials can be used for
adjusting shutter speed and aperture
value.
Help
Guide
Av/Tv Rotate Sets the direction of turning the front
or rear dial or the control wheel to
adjust the aperture value or shutter
speed.
Help
Guide
Dial Ev Comp Sets whether to compensate the
exposure with the front or rear dial.
Help
Guide
Function Ring (Lens) Assigns a function to the function ring
on the lens.
Help
Guide
Func. of Touch Operation Sets which function is activated by
touch operations on the monitor.
94,
95
MOVIE Button Enables or disables the MOVIE button. Help
Guide
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
226
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\100MEN.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Lock Operation Parts Sets whether to disable the multi-
selector, control wheel, or front and
rear dials temporarily when the Fn
button is pressed and held down.
Help
Guide
Audio signals Selects whether the electronic shutter
makes a sound or the camera beeps
during auto focus and self-timer
operations.
Help
Guide
(Network)
Send to Smartphone Func. Sets movies to be transferred to a
smartphone, or transfers images to a
smartphone.
Help
Guide
Send to Computer (Wi-Fi) Backs up images by transferring
them to a computer connected to a
network.
Help
Guide
FTP Transfer Func. Sets image transfer using FTP and
executes it.
* Basic knowledge of FTP server is
required.
204
View on TV Allows you to view images on a
network-enabled TV.
Help
Guide
Ctrl w/ Smartphone Sets the condition for connecting the
camera to a smartphone.
Help
Guide
PC Remote Function Configures settings for PC remote
shooting.
Help
Guide
Airplane Mode Disables wireless communications
from the device such as Wi-Fi, NFC,
and Bluetooth function.
Help
Guide
Wi-Fi Settings Allows you to register your access
point and check or change the Wi-Fi
connection information.
Help
Guide
Green tab
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
227
MENU items/List of icons
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\100MEN.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Bluetooth Settings Configures settings for connecting
the camera to a smartphone or a
Bluetooth remote commander via a
Bluetooth connection.
209,
Help
Guide
Location Info. Link Set. Obtains location information from the
paired smartphone and records it to
captured images.
Help
Guide
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl Sets whether or not to use a
Bluetooth remote commander.
209
Wired LAN Setting Sets the wired LAN. Help
Guide
Edit Device Name Changes the device name under Wi-Fi
Direct, etc.
Help
Guide
Import Root Certificate Imports a root certificate to the
camera.
Help
Guide
Security (IPsec) Sets whether or not to encrypt
communications between the camera
and a computer while they are
connected via Wi-Fi or a wired LAN.
Help
Guide
Reset Network Set. Resets all the network settings. Help
Guide
(Playback)
Protect Protects recorded images against
accidental erasure.
168
Rotate Rotates the image. Help
Guide
Delete Deletes images. 174
Rating Assigns rating to recorded images on
a scale from to .
170
Rating Set (Custom Key) Sets the rating (number of ) that
can be selected using the custom key
to which [Rating] has been assigned
with [ Custom Key].
171
Blue tab
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
228
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\100MEN.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Specify Printing Specifies in advance on the memory
card which still images to print out
later.
Help
Guide
Voice Memo Records, plays back, and deletes voice
memos.
172
Voice Memo PB Volume Sets the playback volume for voice
memos.
Help
Guide
Copy Copies images from the memory card
in the memory card slot designated
in [Select Playback Media] to the
memory card in the other slot.
166
Photo Capture Captures a chosen scene in a movie to
save as a still image.
162
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback images. 160
Enlarge Initial Mag. Sets the initial magnification scale
when playing back enlarged images.
Help
Guide
Enlarge Initial Position Sets the initial magnification area
when playing back enlarged images.
Help
Guide
Cont. PB for Interval Continuously plays back images shot
using interval shooting.
165
PB Speed for Interval Sets the playback speed when
continuously playing back images
with [Cont. PB for Interval].
Help
Guide
Slide Show Plays a slide show. 167
Select Playback Media Selects the memory card slot of the
memory card to be played back.
166
View Mode Plays back images from a specified
date or specified folder of still images
and movies.
165
Image Index Displays multiple images at the same
time.
163
Display as Group Sets whether or not to display images
shot continuously or shot using
interval shooting as a group.
Help
Guide
Display Rotation Sets the playback orientation for
images shot vertically.
161
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
229
MENU items/List of icons
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\100MEN.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Image Jump Setting Sets which dial and method to use
for jumping between images during
playback.
164
(Setup)
Monitor Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the screen. Help
Guide
Viewfinder Bright. Sets the brightness of the viewfinder. Help
Guide
Finder Color Temp. Sets the color temperature of the
viewfinder.
Help
Guide
Volume Settings Sets the volume for movie playback. Help
Guide
Delete confirm. Sets whether [Delete] or [Cancel] is
preselected in the delete confirmation
screen.
Help
Guide
Power Save Start Time Sets the time intervals to
automatically switch to power save
mode.
195
Auto Power OFF Temp. Sets the camera temperature at which
the camera turns off automatically
during shooting. When shooting in
hand-held mode, set to [Standard].
Help
Guide
NTSC/PAL Selector*1Changes the TV format of the device
so that you can shoot in a different
movie format.
Help
Guide
Cleaning Mode Starts the cleaning mode to clean the
image sensor.
240
Touch Operation Sets whether or not to activate the
touch operation of the monitor.
93
Touch Panel/Pad Selects whether to activate touch
panel operation when shooting with
the monitor, or touch pad operation
when shooting with the viewfinder.
93
Yellow tab
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
230
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\100MEN.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Touch Pad Settings Adjusts settings related to touch pad
operation.
Help
Guide
Demo Mode Sets demonstration playback of
movies to on or off.
Help
Guide
TC/UB Settings Sets the time code (TC) and user bit
(UB).
* This function is for skilled movie
creators.
Help
Guide
IR Remote Ctrl Sets whether to use the infrared
remote control.
195
HDMI Settings Sets the HDMI settings. 196
4K Output Select Sets how to record and output 4K
movies via HDMI when the camera is
connected to an external recorder/
player that supports 4K.
157
USB Connection Sets the USB connection method. 211
USB LUN Setting Enhances compatibility by limiting
the functions of USB connection. Set
to [Multi] in normal conditions and
to [Single] only when the connection
cannot be established.
Help
Guide
USB Power Supply Sets whether to supply power via
USB connection when the camera
is connected to a computer or USB
device.
200
Language Selects the language. 42
Date/Time Setup Sets the date, time, and daylight
savings.
42
Area Setting Sets the location of use. Help
Guide
IPTC Information Writes IPTC information when
recording still images.
Help
Guide
Copyright Info Sets copyright information for still
images.
Help
Guide
Write Serial Number Writes the camera’s serial number
to the Exif data when recording still
images.
Help
Guide
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
231
MENU items/List of icons
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\100MEN.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Format Formats the memory card. 189
Rec. Media Settings Sets the method for recording images
to two memory card slots.
192,
Help
Guide
File/Folder Settings Sets file names for still images to be
shot, and specifies folders for storing
the shot still images.
189
File Settings Sets file numbers and file names for
movies to be recorded.
191
Recover Image DB Recovers the image database file and
enables recording and playback.
Help
Guide
Display Media Info. Displays the remaining recording time
of movies and the recordable number
of still images on the memory card.
Help
Guide
Version Displays the camera software version. Help
Guide
Save/Load Settings Saves the camera settings to a
memory card, or reads saved settings
from the memory card.
201
Setting Reset Restores settings to their defaults.
Select [Initialize] to restore all settings
to their default values.
202
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
232
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\100MEN.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
(My Menu)
Add Item Adds desired MENU items to
(My Menu).
183
Sort Item Sorts the MENU items added to
(My Menu).
183
Delete Item Deletes MENU items added to
(My Menu).
184
Delete Page Deletes all the MENU items on a page
in (My Menu).
Help
Guide
Delete All Deletes all the MENU items added to
(My Menu).
Help
Guide
Display From My Menu Sets whether or not to display the
My Menu first when the MENU button
is pressed.
184
*1 If you change this item, you will need to format the memory card for
compatibility with the PAL or NTSC system. Also, note that it may not be
possible to play back movies recorded for the NTSC system on PAL system
TVs.
Gray tab
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
233
MENU items/List of icons
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\100MEN.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\100MEN.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
List of icons on the monitor
The displayed contents and their positions in the illustrations are just
guidelines, and may differ from the actual displays.
Icons on the shooting screen
Monitor mode Viewfinder mode
Shooting mode/
Scene recognition
P P A S M
Shooting mode (101)
Register number (176)
Scene Recognition icons (102)
Camera settings
NO CARD
Memory card status (37, 248)
100 / 1 h 30 m
Remaining number of recordable
images (249) / Recordable time
of movies (250)
Writing data / Number of images
left to write (159)
Aspect ratio of still images
(100)
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
234
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\100MEN.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
24M 21M 20M 16M 10M 9.2M
8.7M 6.9M 6.0M 5.3M 5.1M
4.0M 2.6M 2.3M 2.2M 1.7M
Image size of still images (99)
RAW
RAW recording (compressed/
uncompressed) (98)
X.FINE FINE STD
JPEG Quality (98)
XAVCS4K XAVCSHD AVCHD
File format of movies (149)
Record setting of movies (150)
120p 60p 60i 30p 24p
100p 50p 50i 25p
Frame rate of movies (150)
Proxy Recording (158)
120fps 60fps 30fps 15fps 8fps
4fps
100fps 50fps 25fps 12fps 6fps
3fps 2fps 1fps
Frame rate for slow/quick
motion shooting (152)
APS-C/Super 35mm (100)
Flash charge in progress (138)
Setting Effect OFF (224)
AF Illuminator (63)
Flicker
Flickering detected (76)
SteadyShot off/on, Camera
shake warning (134)
SteadyS. Focal Len./ Camera
shake warning (134)
Smart Zoom/
Clear Image Zoom/ Digital
Zoom (123)
—PC—
PC remote (212)
Bright Monitoring
Shooting without shutter sound
(73)
Remote control (195, 209)
No audio recording of movies
(154)
Wind Noise Reduct. (223)
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
235
MENU items/List of icons
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\100MEN.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Copyright information writing
on (230)
IPTC
IPTC information writing on
(230)
Focus Cancel (94)
Tracking Cancel (95)
Spot Focus
Performing [Spot Focus] (95)
NFC active (203)
Bluetooth connection available/
Bluetooth connection
unavailable (227)
Connected to smartphone/ Not
connected to smartphone
Obtaining location information/
Location information cannot be
obtained (227)
Airplane Mode(226)
Overheating warning
Database file full/Database file
error
Battery
Remaining battery (35)
Remaining battery warning
USB power supply (200)
Shooting settings
Drive Mode (79)
Flash Mode (139)/
Wireless Flash (142)/
Red Eye Reduction (220)
±0.0
Flash Comp. (140)
Focus Mode (47)
Focus Area (49)
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
236
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\100MEN.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
JPEG RAW RAW+J +J
File Format (97)
Metering Mode (113)
AWB
7500K A5 G5
White Balance (Auto, Preset,
Underwater Auto, Custom, Color
temperature, Color filter) (126)
D-Range Optimizer (117)/
Auto HDR (118)
+3 +3 +3
Creative Style (130)/Contrast,
saturation, and sharpness
Picture Effect(221)
Face/Eye Priority in AF (56)
Shutter Type (71)
Prioritize Rec. Media (192)
Focus indicator/exposure
settings
Focus indicator (48)
1/250
Shutter speed
F3.5
Aperture value
Exposure compensation (111)/
Metered Manual
ISO400 ISO AUTO ISO400
ISO sensitivity (120)
AE lock(116)/FEL lock(141)/
AWB lock (128)
Guides/other
Tracking Cancel
Guide display for tracking (95)
Focus Cancel
Guide display for canceling
focusing (94)
Control wheel function
Guide display for My Dial (181)
Bracket indicator (86)
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
237
MENU items/List of icons
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\100MEN.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Spot metering area (113)
Exposure Setting Guide (224)
Shutter speed indicator (33)
Aperture indicator (33)
Histogram (32)
Digital level gauge (34)
STBY REC
Movie recording standby/Movie
recording in progress
1:00:12
Actual movie recording time
(hours: minutes: seconds)
Audio Level Display (222)
REC Control(198)
00:00:00:00
Time code (hours: minutes:
seconds: frames) (230)
00 00 00 00
User Bit (230)
Icons on the playback screen
Single-image playback Histogram display
Basic information
Playback media (166)
View Mode(165)
IPTC
IPTC Information (230)
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
238
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\100MEN.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Rating (170)
Protect (168)
DPOF
DPOF set (228)
3/7
File number/Number of images
in the view mode
NFC active (203)
Remaining battery (35)
Display as Group (228)
Proxy movie included (158)
A voice memo is attached (172)
Camera settings
Refer to “Icons on the shooting
screen” (page233).
Shooting settings
Picture Effect error
Auto HDR error (118)
35mm
Lens focal length
Refer to “Icons on the shooting
screen” (page233) for other icons
displayed in this area.
Image information
Latitude/longitude information
(204)
Copyright information included
2019-1-1 10:37PM
Date of recording (42)
100-0003
Folder number File number
(189)
C0003
Movie file number (191)
Histogram (Luminance/R/G/B)
(32)
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
About this product
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\120OTH.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
GB
239
About this product
About this product
Troubleshooting
If you experience trouble with the product, try the following solutions.
Refer to the “Help Guide” (page2).
Remove the battery pack, wait for about one minute, re-insert the
battery pack, then turn on the power.
Initialize the settings (page202).
Consult your dealer or local authorized service facility. Additional
information on this product and answers to frequently asked
questions can be found at our Customer Support Website.
Americas
https://www.sony.com/am/support
Europe
https://www.sony.eu/support
Asia-Pacific, Oceania, Middle East and Africa
https://www.sony-asia.com/support
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
240
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\120OTH.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Cleaning the image sensor
If dust or debris gets inside the camera and adheres to the surface of
the image sensor (the part that converts the light to an electric signal),
it may appear as dark spots on the image, depending on the shooting
environment. If this happens, follow the steps below to clean the image
sensor.
1 Confirm that the battery has been charged sufficiently.
2 MENU (Setup) [Cleaning Mode] [Enter].
The image sensor vibrates a little to shake off the dust.
3 Turn off the product following the instructions on the screen.
4 Detach the lens.
5 Use the blower to clean the
image sensor surface and the
surrounding area.
6 Attach the lens.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
241
About this product
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\120OTH.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Hint
• For how to check the amount of dust on the image sensor, and for further
details on cleaning methods, please refer to the following URL.
https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/www/support/ilc/sensor/index.php
Note
• Clean the image sensor quickly.
• A blower is not supplied with this product. Use a commercially available
blower.
• Make sure that the remaining battery level is (3 remaining battery icons)
or more, before performing the cleaning.
• Do not use a spray type blower as it may scatter water droplets inside the
camera body.
• Do not put the tip of a blower into the cavity beyond the lens mount area, so
that the tip of the blower does not touch the image sensor.
• Hold the camera slightly face downward so that the dust falls out.
• Do not subject the product to any shock during cleaning.
• When cleaning the image sensor with a blower, do not blow too hard. If you
blow the sensor too hard, the inside of the product may be damaged.
• If the dust remains even after you cleaned the product as described, consult
the service facility.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
242
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\120OTH.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Attaching accessories
Mount Adaptor
Using a Mount Adaptor (sold separately), you can attach an A-mount lens
(sold separately) to this product.
For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the Mount
Adaptor.
Note
• You may not be able to use the Mount Adaptor or auto-focus with certain
lenses. Consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility on
compatible lenses.
• The LA-EA2 or LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold separately) and the vertical grip
(sold separately) are not designed to be attached at the same time. If you
attach them at the same time, the space between the Mount Adaptor and the
vertical grip will become narrow, making the camera difficult to hold.
• You cannot use the AF illuminator when using an A-mount lens.
• The sound of the lens and the product in operation may be recorded
during movie recording. You can turn the sound off by selecting MENU
(Camera Settings 2) [Audio Recording] [Off].
• It may take a long time or may be difficult for the product to focus, depending
on the lens used or the subject.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
243
About this product
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\120OTH.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
LA-EA1/LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor
If you use the LA-EA1 Mount Adaptor (sold separately) or LA-EA3 Mount
Adaptor (sold separately), the following functions are available.
LA-EA1 LA-EA3
Full frame shooting Not available
Available with full frame
shooting-compatible
lenses only
Autofocus Available with SAM/SSM lens only
AF system Phase Detection AF
AF/MF select Can be changed using the operating switch on the
lens.
Focus Mode
Single-shot AF/Continuous AF
• When using a Mount Adaptor in the movie mode,
adjust the aperture value and the focus manually.
Available focus area Wide/ Zone/ Center/ Flexible Spot/
Expand Flexible Spot/ Tracking
SteadyShot In-body
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
244
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\120OTH.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
LA-EA2/LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor
If you use the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately) or LA-EA4 Mount
Adaptor (sold separately), the following functions are available.
LA-EA2 LA-EA4
Full frame shooting Not available
Available with full frame
shooting-compatible
lenses only
Autofocus Available
AF system Phase Detection AF, which is controlled by the
dedicated AF sensor inside the Mount Adaptor
AF/MF select
Lenses that do not support DMF (with a focus mode
switch): Can be changed using the focus mode switch
on the lens.
Lenses that support DMF (with a focus mode switch):
Can be changed using the focus mode switch on the
lens. When the focus mode switch on the lens is set to
AF, you can change the focusing method by operating
the camera.
Other lenses (without a focus mode switch): Can be
changed by operating the camera.
Focus Mode
Single-shot AF/Continuous AF/DMF*
* Only available when using lenses that support Direct
Manual Focus.
• Even if [Priority Set in AF-S] is set to
[Balanced Emphasis], it will temporarily switch to
[AF].
• Even if [Priority Set in AF-C] is set to
[Balanced Emphasis], it will temporarily switch to
[Release].
Available focus area Wide/ Center/ Flexible Spot/ Tracking
SteadyShot In-body
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
245
About this product
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\120OTH.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Continuous shooting using a Mount Adaptor
When a Mount Adaptor is attached to the camera, the auto-focusing
method during continuous shooting varies depending on the settings for
[Cont. Shooting] and [ Shutter Type].
When using the LA-EA1 Mount Adaptor (sold separately), LA-EA2 Mount
Adaptor (sold separately) or LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)
Shutter Type
Mechanical Shutter Auto/Electronic Shutter
Continuous Shooting: Hi The focus is locked to the setting in the first shot.
Continuous Shooting: Mid
Continuous Shooting: Lo The focus continuously tracks the subjects.
When using the LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)
Update the firmware of the Mount Adaptor to the latest version in
advance.
Shutter Type
Mechanical Shutter Auto/Electronic Shutter
Continuous Shooting: Hi The focus continuously
tracks the subjects.*1
The focus continuously
tracks the subjects.*1*2
Continuous Shooting: Mid The focus continuously tracks the subjects.*1
Continuous Shooting: Lo The focus continuously tracks the subjects.
*1 When the F-value is greater than F16, the focus does not track the subjects.
The focus is locked to the setting in the first shot.
*2 The continuous shooting speed varies depending on the [Focus Mode]
setting.
– [Single-shot AF]/[DMF]/[Manual Focus]: Maximum of 20 images per second
(the focus is locked to the setting in the first shot).
– [Continuous AF]: Maximum of 10 images per second
Note
• When you are using a Mount Adaptor, you cannot perform blackout-free
continuous shooting in [Continuous Shooting: Lo] mode (page73).
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
246
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\120OTH.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Vertical grip
You can attach a vertical grip (sold separately) to this product and record
vertically oriented images. When attaching the vertical grip, remove the
battery cover in advance.
For details, refer to the operating instructions for the vertical grip.
To remove the battery cover
For details on how to remove or attach the battery cover, refer to
page24.
• You can attach the removed battery cover to the vertical grip so that
you do not lose it.
• When a vertical grip is attached to this product, the battery remaining is
displayed as
.
Hint
• The battery pack inside the vertical grip can be charged while the vertical grip
is attached to the camera.
Turn the camera off and connect it to a device such as a computer using the
USB cable.
• Use the USB Type-C cable (supplied) or a USB-standard cable.
Note
• The LA-EA2/LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold separately) and the vertical grip are
not designed to be attached at the same time. If you attach them at the same
time, the space between the Mount Adaptor and the vertical grip will become
narrow, making the camera difficult to hold.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
247
About this product
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\120OTH.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Specifications
Battery life and number of recordable images
Battery life Number of images
Shooting
(still images)
Screen mode ― Approx. 690
Viewfinder mode ― Approx. 500
Actual shooting
(movies)
Screen mode Approx. 120 min. ―
Viewfinder mode Approx. 110 min. ―
Continuous shooting
(movies)
Screen mode Approx. 200 min. ―
Viewfinder mode Approx. 195 min. ―
• The above estimates for battery life and number of recordable images
apply when the battery pack has been fully charged. The battery life
and number of images may decrease depending on the conditions of
use.
• The battery life and number of recordable images are estimates based
on shooting with the default settings under the following conditions:
– Using the battery pack at an ambient temperature of 25°C (77°F).
– Using a Sony SDXC memory card(U3) (sold separately)
– Using a FE 28-70 mm F3.5-5.6 OSS lens (sold separately)
• The numbers for “Shooting (still images)” are based on the CIPA
standard and shooting under the following conditions:
(CIPA: Camera & Imaging Products Association)
– One picture is taken every 30seconds.
– The power is turned on and off once every ten times.
• The number of minutes for movie shooting is based on the CIPA
standard and shooting under the following conditions:
– The image quality is set to XAVC S HD 60p 50M / 50p 50M.
– Actual shooting (movies): Battery life based on repeated shooting,
zooming, shooting stand-by, turning on/off, etc.
– Continuous shooting (movies): No operations other than starting and
ending shooting are performed.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
248
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\120OTH.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Memory cards that can be used
This camera only supports SD memory cards (UHS-II compatible).
When using microSD memory cards with this camera, be sure to use the
appropriate adaptor.
Recording format Supported memory card
Still image SD/SDHC/SDXC card
AVCHD SD/SDHC/SDXC card
(Class 4 or faster, or U1 or faster)
XAVC S
4K 60 Mbps*
HD 50 Mbps or lower*
HD 60 Mbps
SDHC/SDXC card
(Class 10, or U1 or faster)
4K 100 Mbps*
HD 100 Mbps SDHC/SDXC card (U3)
* Including when recording proxy movies at the same time
Note
• When an SDHC memory card is used to record an XAVC S movie over
extended periods of time, the recorded movies will be divided into files 4GB
in size. The divided files can be handled as a single file by importing them to a
computer using PlayMemories Home.
• When recording a movie on memory cards in both the slot1 and the slot2
with following camera settings, insert two memory cards with the same file
system. XAVC S movies cannot be recorded simultaneously when using a
combination of the exFAT file system and FAT32 file system.
– [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] or [XAVC S HD]
– [Recording Mode] under [Rec. Media Settings] is set to [Simult.( )] or
[Simult.( / )]
Memory card File system
SDXC memory card exFAT
SDHC memory card FAT32
• Charge the battery pack sufficiently before attempting to recover the
database files on the memory card.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
249
About this product
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\120OTH.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Number of recordable images
When you insert a memory card into the camera and turn the camera on,
the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot
using the current settings) is displayed on the screen.
Note
• When “0” (the number of recordable images) flashes in orange, the memory
card is full. Replace the memory card with another one, or delete images from
the current memory card.
• When “NO CARD” flashes in orange, it means no memory card has been
inserted. Insert a memory card.
The number of images that can be recorded on a memory
card
The table below shows the approximate number of images that can be
recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera. The values are
defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing.
The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions and the type
of memory card used.
[JPEG Image Size]: [L: 24M]
[Aspect Ratio]: [3:2]*1
(Units: Images)
JPEG Quality/ File Format 8 GB 32 GB 64 GB 256 GB
Standard 1100 4550 9000 36000
Fine 780 3150 6300 25000
Extra fine 430 1700 3500 14000
RAW & JPEG (Compressed RAW)*2210 860 1700 6900
RAW (Compressed RAW) 295 1200 2400 9600
RAW & JPEG (Uncompressed RAW)*2125 510 1000 4100
RAW (Uncompressed RAW) 150 610 1200 4950
*1 When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to other than [3:2], you can record more images
than the numbers shown in the table (except when [RAW] is selected).
*2 [ JPEG Quality] when [RAW & JPEG] is selected: [Fine]
Note
• Even if the number of recordable images is higher than 9999 images, “9999”
will appear.
• The numbers shown are when using a Sony memory card.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
250
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\120OTH.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Recordable movie times
The table below shows the approximate total recording times using
a memory card formatted with this camera. The values may vary
depending on the shooting conditions and the type of memory
card used. The recording times for when [ File Format] is set to
[XAVC S 4K] and [XAVC S HD] are recording times when shooting with
[ Proxy Recording] set to [Off].
(h (hour), min (minute))
File Format Record Setting 8 GB 32 GB 64 GB 256 GB
XAVC S 4K 30p 100M/
25p 100M 8min 35min 1h 15min 5h 5min
30p 60M/
25p 60M 10min 55min 2h 8h 5min
24p 100M* 8min 35min 1h 15min 5h 5min
24p 60M* 10min 55min 2h 8h 5min
XAVC S HD 120p 100M/
100p 100M 8min 35min 1h 15min 5h 5min
120p 60M/
100p 60M 10min 55min 2h 8h 5min
60p 50M/
50p 50M 15min 1h 10min 2h 25min 10h
60p 25M/
50p 25M 30min 2h 20min 4h 45min 19h 25min
30p 50M/
25p 50M 15min 1h 10min 2h 25min 10h
30p 16M/
25p 16M 50min 3h 35min 7h 20min 29h 55min
24p 50M* 15min 1h 10min 2h 25min 10h
AVCHD 60i 24M (FX)/
50i 24M (FX) 40min 2h 55min 6h 24h 15min
60i 17M (FH)/
50i 17M (FH) 55min 4h 5min 8h 15min 33h 15min
* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
251
About this product
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\120OTH.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
• The duration of time available for movie recording varies depending on
the file format/recording settings for movies, memory card, ambient
temperature, Wi-Fi network environment, condition of the camera
before you start recording, and condition of the charging of the battery.
The maximum continuous recording time for a single movie shooting
session is approximately 13 hours (a product specification limit).
Note
• The recordable time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with
VBR (Variable Bit-Rate), which automatically adjusts image quality depending
on the shooting scene. When you record a fast-moving subject, the image is
clearer but the recordable time is shorter because more memory is required
for recording. The recordable time also varies depending on the shooting
conditions, the subject or the image quality/size settings.
• The times shown are recordable times using a Sony memory card.
Notes on continuous movie recording
• High-quality movie recording and high-speed continuous shooting
require large amounts of power. Therefore, if you continue to shoot, the
temperature inside the camera will rise, especially that of the image
sensor. In such cases, the camera will turn off automatically because
the surface of the camera is heated to a high temperature or the high
temperature affects the quality of the images or the internal mechanism
of the camera.
• The duration of time available for continuous movie recording when
the camera records with the default settings after the power has been
turned off for a while is as follows. The values indicate the continuous
time from when the camera starts recording until the camera stops
recording.
Ambient
temperature
Continuous recording time for
movies (HD)
Continuous recording time for
movies (4K)
20°C (68°F) Approx. 60min. Approx. 60min.
30°C (86°F) Approx. 60min. Approx. 60min.
40°C (104°F) Approx. 60min. Approx. 30min.
[Auto Power OFF Temp.]: [Standard]
HD: XAVC S HD (60p 50M/50p 50M, when the camera is not connected
via Wi-Fi)
4K: XAVC S 4K (24p 60M/25p 60M, when the camera is not connected
via Wi-Fi)
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
252
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\120OTH.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
• The duration of time available for movie recording varies with the
temperature, file format/record setting for movies, Wi-Fi network
environment, or condition of the camera before you start recording. If
you frequently recompose or shoot images after the power is turned
on, the temperature inside the camera will rise and the recording time
available will be shorter.
• If the icon appears, the temperature of the camera has risen.
• If the camera stops movie recording due to a high temperature, leave
it for some time with the power turned off. Start recording after the
temperature inside the camera drops fully.
• If you observe the following points, you will be able to record movies for
longer periods of time.
– Keep the camera out of direct sunlight.
– Turn the camera off when it is not being used.
• When [ File Format] is set to [AVCHD], the file size of movies is limited
to approx. 2GB. If the movie file size reaches approx. 2GB during
recording, a new movie file will be created automatically.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
253
About this product
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\120OTH.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Specifications
Camera
[System]
Camera Type:
Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera
Lens: Sony E-mount lens
[Image sensor]
Image format: 35mm full frame
(35.6mm × 23.8mm), CMOS image
sensor
Effective pixel number of camera:
Approx. 24200000 pixels
Total pixel number of camera:
Approx. 28300000 pixels
[SteadyShot]
In-camera sensor shift image
stabilization system
[Auto focus system]
Detection system: Phase detection
system/Contrast detection system
Sensitivity Range: –3EV to +20EV (at
ISO 100 equivalent, F2.0)
[Electronic viewfinder]
Type: 1.3 cm (0.5 type) Electronic
Viewfinder
Total number of dots: 3686400dots
Magnification: Approx. 0.78× with
50mm lens at infinity, –1m–1
Eye Point: Approx. 23mm from the
eyepiece and approx. 18.5mm
from the eyepiece frame at –1m–1
Diopter Adjustment:
–4.0m–1 to +3.0m–1
[Monitor]
7.5cm (3.0 type) TFT drive, touch
panel
Total number of dots: 1440000 dots
[Exposure control]
Metering method: 1200-zone
evaluative metering
Metering Range: –3EV to +20EV (at
ISO 100 equivalent with F2.0 lens)
ISO sensitivity (Recommended
exposure index):
Still images: ISO 100 to ISO 51200
(Extended ISO: Minimum ISO 50,
maximum ISO 204800)
Movies: ISO 100 to ISO 51200
equivalent (Extended ISO:
Minimum ISO 100, maximum ISO
102400)
[Shutter]
Type: Electronically-controlled,
vertical-traverse, focal-plane type
Speed range:
Still images (when shooting with
the electronic shutter):
1/32000second* to 30seconds
(up to 1/8second in continuous
shooting)
* Available only in the M(Manual
Exposure) and S(Shutter Priority)
modes. For details, refer to the
“Help Guide.”
Still images (when shooting with
the mechanical shutter):
1/8000second to 30seconds,
BULB
Movies: 1/8000second to
1/4second
108060i-compatible devices
(108050i-compatible devices):
up to 1/60 (1/50) second in AUTO
mode (up to 1/30 (1/25) second in
Auto slow shutter mode)
Flash sync speed: 1/250second
(when using a flash manufactured
by Sony)
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
254
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\120OTH.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
[Recording format]
File format: JPEG (DCF Ver. 2.0, Exif
Ver. 2.31, MPF Baseline) compliant,
RAW (Sony ARW 2.3 format)
Movie (XAVC S format):
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 XAVC S ver.1.0
format compliant
Video: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Audio: LPCM 2ch (48kHz 16bit)
Movie (AVCHD format):
AVCHD format Ver. 2.0 compatible
Video: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Audio: Dolby Digital 2ch, equipped
with Dolby Digital Stereo Creator
• Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories.
[Recording media]
SLOT 1/SLOT 2: Slot for SD cards
(UHS-I and UHS-II compatible)
[Input/output terminals]
USB Type-C terminal:
SuperSpeed USB (USB 3.2 Gen 1)
Multi/Micro USB Terminal*:
Hi-Speed USB (USB 2.0)
* Supports Micro USB compatible
devices.
HDMI: HDMI type D micro jack
(Microphone) terminal:
3.5mm Stereo mini jack
(Headphones) terminal:
3.5mm Stereo mini jack
LAN terminal
(Flash sync) terminal
[General]
Rated input: 7.2V , 3.9W
Operating temperature:
0 to 40°C (32 to 104°F)
Storage temperature:
–20 to 55°C (–4 to 131°F)
Dimensions (W/H/D) (Approx.):
128.9 × 96.4 × 77.5mm
128.9 × 96.4 × 67.3 mm
(from grip to monitor)
51/8 × 37/8 × 31/8in.
51/8 × 37/8 × 23/4in.
(from grip to monitor)
Mass (Approx.):
678g (1lb 8oz) (including battery
pack, SD card)
[Wireless LAN]
WW942051 (see name plate on the
bottom of camera)
Supported format:
IEEE802.11a/b/g/n/ac
Frequency band: 2.4GHz/5GHz
Security: WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
Connection method:
Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)/
Manual
Access method: Infrastructure mode
WW485782 (see name plate on the
bottom of camera)
Supported format:
IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
Frequency band: 2.4 GHz
Security: WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
Connection method:
Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)/
Manual
Access method: Infrastructure mode
[NFC]
Tag type: NFC Forum Type 3 Tag
compliant
[Bluetooth communications]
Bluetooth standard Ver. 4.1
Frequency band: 2.4GHz
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
255
About this product
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\120OTH.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Battery charger BC-QZ1
Rated input:
100- 240V , 50/60Hz, 0.38A
Rated output: 8.4V , 1.6A
Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FZ100
Rated voltage: 7.2V
Design and specifications are subject
to change without notice.
On image data compatibility
• This camera conforms with DCF
(Design rule for Camera File system)
universal standard established
by JEITA (Japan Electronics and
Information Technology Industries
Association).
• Playback of images recorded with
your camera on other equipment
and playback of images recorded
or edited with other equipment on
your camera are not guaranteed.
Trademarks
• XAVC S and are registered
trademarks of Sony Corporation.
• “AVCHD” and the “AVCHD”
logotype are trademarks of
Panasonic Corporation and
Sony Corporation.
• Mac is a trademark of Apple Inc.,
registered in the United States and
other countries.
• iPhone and iPad are trademarks
of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
• Blu-ray Disc™ and Blu-ray™
are trademarks of the
Blu-ray Disc Association.
• DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED
are trademarks of
Digital Living Network Alliance.
• USB Type-C™ and
USB-C™ are trademarks of
USB Implementers Forum.
• Dolby, Dolby Audio and double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
• The terms HDMI, HDMI High-
Definition Multimedia Interface,
and the HDMI Logo are trademarks
or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing Administrator, Inc.
• Microsoft and Windows are
registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the United States and/or other
countries.
• SDXC logo is a trademark of
SD-3C, LLC.
• Android and Google Play
are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Google LLC.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
256
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\120OTH.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 13:31
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
• Wi-Fi, the Wi-Fi logo and
Wi-Fi Protected Setup are registered
trademarks or trademarks of the
Wi-Fi Alliance.
• The N-Mark is a trademark
or registered trademark of
NFC Forum, Inc. in the United States
and in other countries.
• The Bluetooth® word mark and
logos are registered trademarks
owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by
Sony Corporation is under license.
• QR Code is a trademark of
Denso Wave Inc.
• In addition, system and product
names used in this manual are, in
general, trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective
developers or manufacturers.
However, the or marks may
not be used in all cases in this
manual.
On GNU GPL/LGPL applied
software
The software that is eligible for the
following GNU General Public License
(hereinafter referred to as “GPL”) or
GNU Lesser General Public License
(hereinafter referred to as “LGPL”) are
included in the product.
This informs you that you have a
right to have access to, modify,
and redistribute source code for
these software programs under the
conditions of the supplied GPL/LGPL.
Source code is provided on the web.
Use the following URL to download it.
http://oss.sony.net/Products/Linux/
We would prefer you do not contact
us about the contents of source code.
Licenses (in English) are recorded in
the internal memory of your product.
Establish a Mass Storage connection
between the product and a computer
to read licenses in the “PMHOME” -
“LICENSE” folder.
Additional information on this
product and answers to frequently
asked questions can be found at our
Customer Support Website.
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\130IDX.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 09:50
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Index
GB
257
Index
Index
0-9
4K Output Select ............................. 157
24p/60p Output..............................197
A
A .................................................. 104
Access Point Set. ............................ 208
Add Item .........................................183
AdobeRGB .......................................133
AEL .................................................. 116
AE lock ............................................. 116
AEL w/ shutter ............................... 220
AF ....................................................49
AF Area Auto Clear ..........................218
AF Area Registration .........................61
AF-C .................................................. 47
AF drive speed ............................... 222
AF Illuminator ................................... 63
AF in Focus Mag. .............................221
AF/MF control .................................. 55
AF Micro Adj. ....................................64
AF On ................................................ 56
AF-S .................................................. 47
AF Tracking Sens. .................... 218, 222
AF w/ shutter ..................................218
Airplane Mode ............................... 226
Anti-flicker Shoot. ............................ 76
Aperture Drive in AF ........................66
Aperture Preview ............................185
Aperture Priority ............................ 104
APS-C/Super 35mm ....................... 100
Area Setting ...................................230
Aspect .............................................156
Aspect Ratio ................................... 100
Audio Level Display ....................... 222
Audio Out Timing .......................... 222
Audio Rec Level ..............................155
Audio Recording .............................154
Audio recording of movies .............154
Audio signals ................................. 226
Autoflash .........................................139
Auto focus ........................................ 49
Auto HDR ........................................ 118
Auto Mode ....................................... 43
Auto Power OFF Temp. .................. 229
Auto Review ....................................185
Auto Slow Shutter .......................... 222
Auto Switch Media ......................... 194
Autumn leaves ................................ 131
AVCHD .............................................149
Av/Tv Rotate .................................. 225
AWB ................................................. 126
AWB lock .........................................128
B
Battery pack ..................................... 36
Blackout-free shooting .................... 72
Black & White .................................. 131
Bluetooth function ......................... 203
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl .........................209
Bluetooth Settings ......................... 209
Bracket Settings ...............................89
BULB ................................................ 107
Bulb shooting ..................................107
C
Camera Settings 1 ...........................216
Camera Settings 2 .......................... 222
Center ........................... 49, 113, 115, 156
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
258
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\130IDX.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 09:50
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Charging ........................................... 35
Circ. of Focus Point ...........................64
Cleaning Mode ...............................240
Clear ................................................130
Clear Image Zoom ...................123, 124
Clock setting .................................... 42
Cloudy .............................................126
Color Space .....................................133
Compatible lenses ............................41
Computer ................................. 211, 213
Cont. Bracket .................................... 84
Continuous AF .................................. 47
Continuous shooting .......................80
Cont. PB for Interval ........................165
Contrast ........................................... 132
Control wheel ................................... 25
Cont. Shooting ................................. 79
Cont. Shoot. Length ..........................81
Copy ............................................... 166
Copyright Info ................................230
Creative Style ..................................130
C.Temp./Filter .................................. 126
CTRL FOR HDMI .............................. 199
Ctrl w/ Smartphone ....................... 226
Custom Key .....................................179
Custom white balance .................... 127
D
Date/Time Setup .............................42
Daylight ...........................................126
Deep ................................................130
Default values ................................ 202
Delete .............................................. 174
Delete confirm. .............................. 229
Delete Item .................................... 184
Del. Regist. AF Area .........................218
Demo Mode ................................... 230
Dial Ev Comp .................................. 225
Dial Setup ....................................... 225
Digital zoom .............................123, 124
Diopter-adjustment ..........................18
Direct manual focus ....................47, 68
DISP ...................................................31
DISP Button ...................................... 33
Disp. cont. AF area ..........................219
Display as Group ............................ 228
Display From My Menu .................. 184
Displaying vertically oriented images
.................................................... 161
Display Media Info. .........................231
Display Rotation .............................. 161
DMF .............................................47, 68
D-Range Optimizer ......................... 117
Drive Mode ....................................... 79
DRO ................................................. 117
DRO/Auto HDR .........................117, 118
DRO Bracket ..................................... 88
E
Edit Device Name ........................... 227
e-Front Curtain Shutter .................... 78
Electronic Shutter ............................. 72
Enlarge Image ................................ 160
Enlarge Initial Mag. ........................ 228
Enlarge Initial Position ................... 228
Entire Screen Avg. ........................... 113
Expand Flexible Spot .......................49
Exp. comp. set ................................ 220
Exposure Comp. ............................... 111
Exposure Set. Guide ....................... 224
Exposure Std. Adjust ......................220
Exposure step .................................219
Eye AF ......................................... 56, 58
Eye sensor ......................................... 17
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
259
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\130IDX.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 09:50
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Index
Eye-Start AF .....................................218
F
Face Detection .......................... 56, 114
Face/Eye AF Set. ............................... 56
Face Priority in Multi Metering ....... 114
Face Registration ............................221
FEL lock ........................................... 141
File/Folder Settings ........................ 189
File Format ................................ 97, 149
File name........................................ 189
File Settings ..................................... 191
Fill-flash ...........................................139
Finder Color Temp. ......................... 229
Finder Frame Rate .......................... 188
FINDER/MONITOR ........................... 187
Flash ................................................138
Flash bracket .................................... 84
Flash Comp. .................................... 140
Flash Mode ......................................139
Flash Off ..........................................139
Flash sync terminal .........................143
Flexible Spot .....................................49
Fluor.: Cool White............................126
Fluor.: Daylight ................................ 126
Fluor.: Day White.............................126
Fn ................................................18, 26
Focus ................................................ 47
Focus Area ........................................ 49
Focus Area Limit .............................. 52
Focus Frame Color ........................... 63
Focus indicator .................................48
Focus-lock ........................................46
Focus Magnifier ...............................69
Focus Magnif. Time .........................221
Focus Mode ...................................... 47
Focus Point Link .............................. 115
Focus Settings ................................. 217
Focus Standard ................................ 53
Folder name ............................. 189, 191
Format ............................................ 189
FTP Transfer Func. .......................... 204
Func. of Touch Operation .......... 94, 95
Function button ..........................18, 26
Function Menu Set. .......................... 28
Function Ring (Lens) ...................... 225
G
Grid Line ......................................... 224
Guideframe .....................................156
H
HDMI Info. Display ..........................197
HDMI Only (24p) ..............................157
HDMI Only (25p) .............................. 157
HDMI Only (30p)..............................157
HDMI Resolution ............................ 196
HDMI Settings ................................ 196
HDR ................................................. 118
Help Guide ......................................... 2
High ISO NR ..................................... 137
Highlight ......................................... 113
Histogram ........................................ 32
I
Image Index ....................................163
Image Jump Setting ....................... 164
Image sensor .................................240
Imaging Edge ..................................213
Imaging Edge Mobile .................... 203
Import Root Certificate .................. 227
In-Camera Guide ................................ 2
Incandescent ...................................126
Index screen .................................... 163
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
260
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\130IDX.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 09:50
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Initial Focus Mag. .................... 221, 222
Intelligent Auto .........................43, 102
Interval Shooting .............................90
IPTC Information ............................ 230
IR Remote Ctrl .................................195
ISO ...................................................120
ISO AUTO .........................................120
ISO AUTO Min. SS ............................ 121
ISO Range Limit .............................. 121
ISO sensitivity ..................................120
ISO Setting ......................................120
J
JPEG .................................................. 97
JPEG Image Size ...............................99
JPEG Quality .....................................98
L
Landscape .......................................130
Language ....................................... 230
Lens .................................................. 39
Lens Comp.......................................216
Light ................................................130
List of icons .................................... 233
Live View Display ........................... 224
Location Info. Link Set. ................... 227
Location information .....................204
Lock Operation Parts ..................... 226
Long Exposure NR ...........................136
M
M ................................................... 106
Manual Exposure ........................... 106
Manual Focus .............................. 47, 67
Marker Display ................................156
Marker Settings ...............................156
Mass Storage................................... 211
Memory ........................................... 176
Memory card ......................37, 189, 248
Memory Card + HDMI ..................... 157
Memory recall ................................ 108
MENU ...............................................215
MENU button ............................. 17, 215
MENU items.....................................216
Metering Mode ............................... 113
MF ................................................ 47, 67
MF Assist .......................................... 70
Mode dial ........................................ 101
Monitor ...................................... 31, 233
Monitor Brightness ........................ 229
Mount Adaptor .........................41, 242
Movie....................................... 109, 145
MOVIE Button ................................. 225
Movie file format.............................149
MOVIE (Movie) button .............. 18, 145
Movie w/ shutter ............................147
MTP ................................................. 211
Multi ................................................ 113
Multi Interface Shoe .........................20
Multi-selector ................................... 26
My Dial Settings .............................. 181
My Menu ................................. 183, 232
N
Network .......................................... 226
Neutral.............................................130
NFC ................................................. 203
Night Scene .....................................130
Noise reduction ...............................136
NR ....................................................136
NTSC/PAL Selector ......................... 229
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
261
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\130IDX.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 09:50
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Index
O
One-touch (NFC) ............................ 203
Operating sound ............................ 226
P
P ....................................................103
Pairing ............................................209
PB Speed for Interval ..................... 228
PC Remote Function .......................212
Peaking Setting ............................... 221
Phase Detect. Area .........................219
Phase detection AF .......................... 52
Photo Capture .................................162
Picture Effect ...................................221
Playback .................................. 159, 227
Playback speed ............................... 153
Playback zoom ............................... 160
Playing back movies ....................... 161
PlayMemories Home ......................214
Portrait ............................................130
Power Save Start Time ....................195
Pre-AF ..............................................218
Printing ........................................... 228
Printing the date .............................. 43
Prioritize Rec. Media ................. 38, 192
Priority Set in AF-C ..........................217
Priority Set in AF-S ..........................217
Priority Set in AWB ......................... 220
Program Auto ..................................103
Program shift ..................................103
Protect ............................................ 168
Proxy Recording ..............................158
Q
Quick Navi ........................................ 28
R
Rating ..............................................170
Rating Set (Custom Key) ................. 171
RAW .................................................. 97
RAW File Type ..................................98
RAW images ..................................... 97
RAW & JPEG...................................... 97
Rear Sync. ........................................139
REC Control .................................... 198
Rec. Media Settings ........................192
Recordable number of images ...... 249
Recordable time of movies ........... 250
Recording Mode .............................193
Record Setting ............................... 150
Recover Image DB ..........................231
Red Eye Reduction .........................220
Reg. Custom Shoot Set ................... 177
Regist. Faces Priority ....................... 221
Release w/o Card .......................... 223
Release w/o Lens .......................... 223
Remote Camera Tool ......................214
Remote commander ...............195, 209
Reset EV Comp. ...............................219
Reset Network Set.......................... 227
Rotate ............................................. 227
S
S ....................................................105
Safety Zone .....................................156
Saturation ........................................132
Save/Load Settings .........................201
Scene recognition ...........................102
Screen display ...................................31
Security (IPsec) ............................... 227
Select Media ...................................217
Select Playback Media ................... 166
Self-timer ......................................... 82
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
262
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\130IDX.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 09:50
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Self-timer (Cont) .............................. 83
Self-timer Type ................................217
Send to Computer (Wi-Fi) .............. 226
Send to Smartphone Func. ............ 226
Sensitivity ........................................120
Sepia ............................................... 131
Setting Reset .................................. 202
Setup .............................................. 229
Shade ..............................................126
Sharpness........................................132
Shooting still images ....................... 45
Shoot. Start Disp. ............................. 76
Shoot. Timing Disp. .......................... 75
Shot. Result Preview ...................... 186
Shutter AWB Lock ...........................128
Shutter Priority ................................105
Shutter Type ...................................... 71
Single Bracket .................................. 85
Single Shooting ................................ 79
Single-shot AF .................................. 47
Slideshow ........................................167
Slow Sync. .......................................139
Smart zoom .....................................123
Software ..........................................213
Sort Item .........................................183
Specifications ................................. 253
Specify Printing .............................. 228
Spot ................................................. 113
Spot Focus ........................................95
Spot Metering Point ........................ 115
S&Q .................................................152
S&Q Motion .....................................110
S&Q Settings ...................................152
sRGB ................................................ 133
SteadyShot ......................................134
SteadyShot Settings ........................134
Style Box .......................................... 131
Sunset .............................................130
Switch V/H AF Area .......................... 54
T
TC Output ....................................... 198
TC/UB Settings ............................... 230
Touch Focus .....................................94
Touch function ................................. 93
Touch Operation .............................. 93
Touch Pad Settings ........................230
Touch Panel/Pad .............................. 93
Touch Tracking ................................. 95
Tracking ...................................... 49, 60
U
Underwater Auto ............................126
USB .................................................. 211
USB Connection .............................. 211
USB LUN Setting .............................230
USB Power Supply..........................200
V
Version ............................................231
Vertical grip .................................... 246
Video Light Mode .......................... 223
Viewfinder ......................................... 31
Viewfinder Bright. .......................... 229
View Mode ......................................165
View on TV (Wi-Fi).......................... 226
Vivid ................................................130
Voice Memo ....................................172
Voice Memo PB Volume ................ 228
Volume .................................... 162, 229
Volume Settings ...................... 162, 229
ILCE-9M2
5-010-473-11 (1)
GB
263
C:\5010473111\5010473111ILCE9M2IN5\01GB-ILCE9M2IN5\130IDX.indd
DTP data saved: 2019/07/26 09:50
PDF file created: 2019/08/06 10:23
Index
W
WB ...................................................126
WB bracket ....................................... 87
White Balance .................................126
Wide ................................................. 49
Wi-Fi ............................................... 203
Wi-Fi Settings ................................. 226
Wind Noise Reduct. ....................... 223
Wired LAN Setting.......................... 227
Wireless Flash .................................142
Write Serial Number ......................230
X
XAVC S 4K ........................................149
XAVC S HD .......................................149
Z
Zebra Setting.................................. 224
Zone .................................................49
Zoom ...............................................123
Zoom Ring Rotate .......................... 223
Zoom scale ......................................125
Zoom Setting .......................... 124, 223